SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.

4 – Operation
Introduction 1

Basics 2

3
SIMATIC Data analysis

Manual data acquisition 4

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 Configuration of the
5
analysis objects
– Operation
Project configuration 6
Operating Manual

Settings 7

Notification Center 8

Service Cockpit 9

Reference 10

04/2023
A5E45273397-AJ
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E45273397-AJ Copyright © Siemens AG 2023.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 04/2023 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 8
1.1 Security information ............................................................................................................ 8
1.2 Note on the EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) .................................................. 8
1.3 Why we need energy management ...................................................................................... 9
1.4 What can Energy Manager Basic contribute to the topic of energy management?................ 10
1.5 Areas of application ........................................................................................................... 10
1.6 Preface .............................................................................................................................. 11
2 Basics ................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 12
2.2 Login ................................................................................................................................. 15
2.3 Definition of home page .................................................................................................... 18
2.4 Navigation ......................................................................................................................... 20
2.5 Search for object................................................................................................................ 22
2.6 Consumers and structured view on the web ....................................................................... 24
2.7 Quicklinks .......................................................................................................................... 26
2.7.1 Creating Quicklinks in the Web ........................................................................................... 26
2.7.2 Editing Quicklinks in the Web ............................................................................................. 28
3 Data analysis........................................................................................................................................ 31
3.1 Folder ................................................................................................................................ 31
3.2 Widget dashboards ............................................................................................................ 32
3.2.1 Overview of Widget Dashboards......................................................................................... 32
3.2.2 Widget Dashboards for consumers ..................................................................................... 36
3.3 Online Monitoring ............................................................................................................. 38
3.4 Reports .............................................................................................................................. 41
3.5 Diagrams ........................................................................................................................... 46
3.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 46
3.5.2 Configuring charts ............................................................................................................. 54

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 3
Table of contents

4 Manual data acquisition ...................................................................................................................... 57

4.1 Datapoints ......................................................................................................................... 57
4.2 Parameter.......................................................................................................................... 59
4.3 Matrices ............................................................................................................................ 62
4.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 62
4.3.2 Configuring matrices ......................................................................................................... 64
4.4 Setting up mobile data acquisition with the SIMATIC Energy Manager app for iOS and
Android ............................................................................................................................. 66
4.5 Importing measured values ................................................................................................ 68
5 Configuration of the analysis objects.................................................................................................. 72
5.1 Shortcut menu................................................................................................................... 72
5.2 Tree configuration ............................................................................................................. 74
5.3 Dashboards ....................................................................................................................... 76
5.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 76
5.3.2 Setting up dashboards ....................................................................................................... 76
5.3.3 Editing dashboards ............................................................................................................ 77
5.3.4 Deleting dashboards .......................................................................................................... 79
5.3.5 Widgets ............................................................................................................................. 80
5.3.5.1 Creating Widgets ............................................................................................................... 80
5.3.5.2 Editing widgets .................................................................................................................. 81
5.3.5.3 Available widgets............................................................................................................... 82
5.3.5.4 Widget configuration ......................................................................................................... 95
5.4 Reports ............................................................................................................................ 117
5.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 117
5.4.2 Creating reports............................................................................................................... 117
5.4.3 Editing reports ................................................................................................................. 124
5.4.4 Deleting reports ............................................................................................................... 125
5.5 Diagrams ......................................................................................................................... 126
5.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 126
5.5.2 Creating charts ................................................................................................................ 126
5.5.3 Editing charts .................................................................................................................. 128
5.5.4 Deleting charts ................................................................................................................ 129
5.6 Matrices .......................................................................................................................... 130
5.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 130
5.6.2 Creating matrices............................................................................................................. 130
5.6.3 Editing matrices ............................................................................................................... 131
5.6.4 Deleting matrices............................................................................................................. 132
5.7 Folders ............................................................................................................................ 133
5.7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 133
5.7.2 Creating folders ............................................................................................................... 133
5.7.3 Editing folders ................................................................................................................. 135
5.7.4 Deleting folders ............................................................................................................... 136

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

4 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Table of contents

6 Project configuration ......................................................................................................................... 137

6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 137
6.2 Creating subfolders .......................................................................................................... 140
6.3 Data source ..................................................................................................................... 142
6.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 142
6.3.2 Creating data sources....................................................................................................... 144
6.3.3 Editing data sources ......................................................................................................... 146
6.3.4 Deleting data sources....................................................................................................... 147
6.3.5 Manual acquisition........................................................................................................... 148
6.3.6 Derived data points .......................................................................................................... 148
6.3.7 Data channels .................................................................................................................. 149
6.3.7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 149
6.3.7.2 Creating data channels..................................................................................................... 151
6.3.7.3 Creating an ASCII channel ................................................................................................ 153
6.3.7.4 Create OPC DA, OPC HDA, OPC UA channel ....................................................................... 156
6.3.7.5 Creating an Energy Suite channel ..................................................................................... 160
6.3.7.6 Creating a WinCC channel ................................................................................................ 163
6.3.7.7 Creating a Modbus TCP channel ....................................................................................... 165
6.3.7.8 Creating a Desigo CC channel ........................................................................................... 170
6.3.7.9 Creating a WinCC Unified Data Provider channel ............................................................... 172
6.3.7.10 Editing data channels....................................................................................................... 174
6.3.7.11 Deleting data channels..................................................................................................... 175
6.3.7.12 Data point - Administration .............................................................................................. 176
6.4 Data point........................................................................................................................ 179
6.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 179
6.4.2 Creating data points......................................................................................................... 181
6.4.3 Configuration of the data points....................................................................................... 182
6.4.3.1 Configuring general settings ............................................................................................ 182
6.4.3.2 Configuring interfaces...................................................................................................... 184
6.4.3.3 Configuring counters ....................................................................................................... 187
6.4.3.4 Configuring the plausibility settings ................................................................................. 189
6.4.3.5 Configuring the compression settings .............................................................................. 191
6.4.3.6 Configuring replacement value strategies......................................................................... 192
6.4.3.7 Configuring MindSphere settings ..................................................................................... 194
6.4.4 Editing data points ........................................................................................................... 195
6.4.5 Deleting data points......................................................................................................... 198
6.4.6 Recalculating derived data point....................................................................................... 198
6.5 Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 199
6.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 199
6.5.2 Creating parameters ........................................................................................................ 201
6.5.3 Editing parameters........................................................................................................... 203
6.5.4 Deleting parameters ........................................................................................................ 204
6.6 MEVA / KPI ....................................................................................................................... 205
6.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 205
6.6.2 Creating MEVAs / KPIs ...................................................................................................... 207
6.6.3 Editing MEVAs / KPIs......................................................................................................... 211
6.6.4 Deleting MEVAs / KPIs ...................................................................................................... 212

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 5
Table of contents

7 Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 213

7.1 Overview of settings ........................................................................................................ 213
7.2 Mail settings .................................................................................................................... 216
7.3 Account settings .............................................................................................................. 218
7.4 Web Client settings .......................................................................................................... 224
7.5 User management ........................................................................................................... 226
7.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 226
7.5.2 Creating users.................................................................................................................. 228
7.5.3 Editing users .................................................................................................................... 230
7.5.4 Deleting users.................................................................................................................. 231
7.6 Units ............................................................................................................................... 232
7.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 232
7.6.2 Creating units .................................................................................................................. 234
7.6.3 Editing units .................................................................................................................... 235
7.6.4 Deleting units .................................................................................................................. 236
7.7 Alarm lists........................................................................................................................ 237
7.7.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 237
7.7.2 Editing alarm lists ............................................................................................................ 238
7.8 Backup ............................................................................................................................ 239
7.9 Regional settings ............................................................................................................. 241
7.10 Modbus device templates ................................................................................................ 243
7.10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 243
7.10.2 Exporting Modbus device templates ................................................................................. 244
7.10.3 Creating a Modbus device template ................................................................................. 244
7.10.4 Editing a Modbus device template.................................................................................... 246
7.10.5 Deleting a Modbus device template.................................................................................. 246
7.11 Data provider................................................................................................................... 247
8 Notification Center ............................................................................................................................ 249
9 Service Cockpit .................................................................................................................................. 253
9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 253
9.2 Navigation area ............................................................................................................... 254
9.3 Services ........................................................................................................................... 255
9.4 System ............................................................................................................................ 256
9.5 Installed software ............................................................................................................ 256
9.6 Log files........................................................................................................................... 257
9.7 Gap recognition ............................................................................................................... 260
9.8 Troubleshooting with log files .......................................................................................... 261
9.8.1 Kernel fault...................................................................................................................... 261
9.8.2 Acquisition service error................................................................................................... 262
9.8.3 Reporting service error ..................................................................................................... 263
9.8.4 Reporting service error ..................................................................................................... 264

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

6 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Table of contents

10 Reference........................................................................................................................................... 265
10.1 Correction status of a value .............................................................................................. 265
10.2 Time unit abbreviations.................................................................................................... 267
10.3 Unit conversion Energy/Power.......................................................................................... 267
10.4 Existing functional groups ................................................................................................ 268
10.5 Available functional rights................................................................................................ 268
10.6 Functions for measuring variables .................................................................................... 276
10.7 ASCII FTP formats ............................................................................................................. 300
10.7.1 ASCII FTP import interface ................................................................................................ 300
10.7.2 APROL ............................................................................................................................. 301
10.7.3 BDATA ............................................................................................................................. 302
10.7.4 BDATA_XML_Format ........................................................................................................ 303
10.7.5 DALOG............................................................................................................................. 304
10.7.6 EXCELCSV ........................................................................................................................ 305
10.7.7 EXCELCSVNODST ............................................................................................................. 306
10.7.8 FREJA............................................................................................................................... 307
10.7.9 TextValue ........................................................................................................................ 308
10.7.10 ZenOn ............................................................................................................................. 308
10.8 Log files ........................................................................................................................... 309
10.8.1 Kernel.............................................................................................................................. 309
10.8.2 Acquisition service ........................................................................................................... 314
10.8.2.1 Compression.................................................................................................................... 314
10.8.2.2 Raw file provider .............................................................................................................. 317
10.8.2.3 SinkDataImporter............................................................................................................. 317
10.8.2.4 Data deletion ................................................................................................................... 318
10.8.2.5 Acquisition component Host ............................................................................................ 318
10.8.2.6 SQL provider .................................................................................................................... 318
10.8.3 Calculation service ........................................................................................................... 319
10.8.3.1 Calculation service ........................................................................................................... 319
10.8.3.2 Recalculation ................................................................................................................... 319
10.8.3.3 MEVA calculation ............................................................................................................. 322
10.8.3.4 Counter calculation.......................................................................................................... 322
10.8.3.5 Machine calculation ......................................................................................................... 322
10.8.3.6 Calculation component host............................................................................................. 322
10.8.4 Report Server ................................................................................................................... 323
10.8.5 MindUpload ..................................................................................................................... 324
10.8.6 Tasks ............................................................................................................................... 324
10.9 Cipher Suites.................................................................................................................... 325
10.10 Counter value filtering ..................................................................................................... 327
10.11 Provision of Energy Manager data .................................................................................... 331
10.11.1 Energy Manager Data Service ........................................................................................... 331
10.11.1.1 Basics on the Energy Manager Data Service ...................................................................... 331
10.11.1.2 Interface description of the Energy Manager Data Service ................................................. 331
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 332

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 7
Introduction 1
1.1 Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure to
cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed visit (http://support.automation.siemens.com).

1.2 Note on the EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)

Siemens adheres to the principles of data protection, in particular the principle of data
minimization (privacy by design). For this product, SIMATIC Energy Manager, this means: The
product processes/stores the following personal data:
User name, first name and surname, e-mail address, department, address, country, phone
number and user role. In addition, relevant changes to the configuration, such as data points,
MEVAs/KPIs, reports or changes to measured values are logged together with time stamps
and user information.
The above data is required for login, internal user administration (the authorized user can see
the role and status of other users) and audit trail.
The storage of data is appropriate and limited to what is necessary to identify the authorized
operators and to meet basic audit trail requirements.
The above data will not be stored anonymously or pseudonymized, as the purpose
(identification of the operating personnel) cannot be achieved otherwise. The data will be
used only within the product and will not be automatically passed on to third parties or
unauthorized persons.
Our product does not provide for automatic deletion of the above data.
Regarding cookies, please refer to the Siemens cookie guidelines
(http://www.siemens.com/cookie-policy-en).

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

8 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Introduction
1.3 Why we need energy management

1.3 Why we need energy management

Energy costs take a substantial slice in the cost balance of many companies. However, it is
possible to significantly reduce this cost factor by optimizing energy consumption and taking
advantage of the benefits offered by the liberalized energy market. Investments in this
optimization process can be amortized on a short-term basis in many cases. Utilization of the
entire spectrum of energy cost reduction demands integrated system solutions: the range
covers the monitoring, analysis, and evaluation of the relevant energy and operational data,
as well as energy forecasts and optimization functions. Under the aspect of a continuous
adaptation process that is enforced based on requirements of the liberalized energy market,
it must be possible to adapt the systems used without considerable investment. The
following sections provide more arguments in favor of energy management.
• Rising energy costs.
• Only partial transparency across infrastructure processes, preventing an overall
assessment of all processes and media.
• Cost centers or cost units change continuously.
• The existing heterogeneous system environment poses high demands on interface
management.
• Equipment for automatic measurement data recording is not available in the relevant
areas.
• Poor transparency prevents further optimization of energy supply contracts.
• In many cases, energy costs represent an extremely high portion of unmanaged
production costs.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 9
Introduction
1.4 What can Energy Manager Basic contribute to the topic of energy management?

1.4 What can Energy Manager Basic contribute to the topic of energy
management?
Energy Manager Basic is the ideal entry-level solution for a comprehensive energy
management approach. Energy Manager Basic can be updated to Energy Manager PRO.
Thanks to its flexible scalability, Energy Manager PRO can serve both medium-sized
companies and large corporations with location-spanning requirements.
The interface management, which can be configured by the user, provides direct interfaces
to Siemens products such as OPC UA, WinCC, PCS 7, Modbus and Energy Suite. At the
interfaces, configuration synchronization of the data points is supported.
Functions for data plausibility checks and various substitute value strategies are available to
achieve a high-quality database.
Transparency of the energy flows in all types of media in a company is indispensable for
energy management. Energy Manager Basic is the ideal tool for calculating energy and
material balances as well as key figures that can be used to compare different processes or
even different operations.
Only the allocation of energy costs based on the cost-by-cause principle generates cost
transparency and increased awareness of the topic of energy costs. The Cost Center
Management tool of Energy Manager Basic maps cost centers and allocates consumption
accordingly based on distribution codes, area data, employees, or measured data.
It also enables the mapping of cost center changes during the year, as the calculation logic
and all changes are recorded. Reproducibility of report results is of particular importance in
this area. All changes made to the data are also recorded. This means that users can always
rely on the old data for their evaluations.
An automatic reporting system that is easy to configure forms a key factor that results in a
significant reduction of personnel workload. At the same time, the quality of the reports is
greatly improved.

1.5 Areas of application

Energy Manager Basic acts as a link between the process and office environments, focusing
on energy management in industry.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

10 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Introduction
1.6 Preface

1.6 Preface
Purpose of this documentation
This documentation contains information pertaining to the functionality of Energy Manager
Basic. Energy Manager Basic is a functionally limited version of Energy Manager PRO Web.
The complete functionality of Energy Manager PRO Web is described in this manual. If a
function described in this manual is not available to the Energy Manager Basic user or only
partially available, this is indicated by user prompts in the appropriate place. The user
information a limited function of Energy Manager Basic do not apply to the Energy Manager
PRO user.
This documentation is aimed at plant managers, planners, and plant operators as well as
service and maintenance personnel.

Basic knowledge required

General knowledge in the fields of IT, automation engineering, as well as general electrical
engineering is indispensable for comprehension of this manual.

WARNING
Working with electrical systems
Energy Manager Basic does not exempt users from responsibilities with respect to the
handling of electrical systems.

Moreover, it is presumed that users have appropriate knowledge related to the use of
computers running on a Windows operating system.

Scope of this manual

This manual is valid for Energy Manager Basic.

Guides in the manual

The manual contains the following guides that support rapid access to the information you
require:
• A complete table of contents and a list of all tables are available in the opening section of
the manual.
• An overview of the topical contents is provided at the beginning of each chapter.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 11
Basics 2
2.1 Introduction

Overview
Energy Manager Web is a browser-based user interface for the Energy Manager energy
management system. Energy Manager PRO Web is used to access Energy Manager PRO via
the Internet/Intranet.
The administrator configures the data you may access in Energy Manager.

Note
Installation of Energy Manager Web
You can find information on the installation of Energy Manager Web in the installation
manual "Energy Manager - Installation", section "Setting up Energy Manager Web".

NOTICE
Secure connection between web client and web server
If you configure the connection between web client and web server, use only secure Cipher
Suites.
A list of secure Cipher Suites can be found in the reference under "Cipher Suites".

Login and logout

In order to work with Energy Manager Web, you need a user name, a password associated
with it, and rights to the data that you want to view.
For security reasons, a user is automatically logged out after a period of inactivity. The
duration of inactivity is configurable globally in the Web.config file or in Microsoft Internet
Information Services (IIS).

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

12 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.1 Introduction

User interface of Energy Manager Web

The following figure shows the user interface of Energy Manager Web:

① Navigation area
In the navigation area, select the objects you want to view or edit. Use the structure tree or the Quicklinks of the
toolbar for navigation. The navigation options available depend on your user rights.
② Detail area
Widget Dashboards and objects such as reports or charts are displayed in the detail area. The selection in the navi-
gation area and the selected query type and observation period determine which objects are displayed.

Tasks in Energy Manager Web

Use Energy Manager Web to handle the following tasks:
• Viewing, configuring and creating:
– Reports
– Charts
– Matrices
– Widget Dashboards
– Folder
• Opening documents and uploading new documents in Energy Manager
• Viewing and editing energy efficiency measures
• Manual measurement data value acquisition
• Creation and configuration of data sources, data points, parameters and key performance
indicators
• Configuring the system settings

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
The configuration of energy efficiency measures and file management is not available in
Energy Manager Basic.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 13
Basics
2.1 Introduction

See also
Navigation (Page 20)
Login (Page 15)
Definition of home page (Page 18)
Configuration of the analysis objects (Page 72)
Manual data acquisition (Page 57)
Project configuration (Page 137)
Settings (Page 213)
Data analysis (Page 31)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

14 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.2 Login

2.2 Login

Overview
You can open the Energy Manager Web home page at the following URL:
• http://<Energy Manager Webserver>/EnMPROWeb
Contact your administrator to obtain the address or name of the Energy Manager Web Server.
Energy Manager Web supports secure communication with the Energy Manager Web Server
via https. Your administrator can provide you with all information needed to use https
communication.
If you log into Energy Manager Web with Active Directory, check the following settings of the
web browser, if necessary:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer:
– "Internet options > Advanced > Security > Enable Integrated Windows Authentication".
• Mozilla Firefox:
– Enable the URL of Energy Manager Web in "about:config" of the web browser.
– Open Energy Manager Web via "Fully-Qualified Host Name".
You can find additional information in the section "Setting up Energy Manager Web" in the
installation manual "Energy Manager - Installation".

Procedure
1. Start an Internet browser and enter the appropriate URL .
The login page of Energy Manager Web opens.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 15
Basics
2.2 Login

2. If the "Single Sign On" option is activated for your user account or your user group, the user
name and password do not have to be entered. Click the "Windows logon" button instead.
You are then logged into Energy Manager PRO Web with your Windows user name and your
Windows password.

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
The ""Single Sign On" option is not available in Energy Manager Basic.

3. If the option "Single Sign On" is not activated for your user account, enter the user name and
password.
To do this, use your login information for Energy Manager.
4. Activate the "Remember user name" check box to save the login data for the next
authentication.
5. Select the language in the "Languages" drop-down list, if necessary. The following
languages are available:
– German
– English
– Spanish
– French
– Italian
– Chinese
6. If you want to change your password, click "Change Password".
7. If you want to generate a temporary password, click "Password Lost".
The "Password Lost" page is opened.

8. Click "Login".

Result
You are now logged in to Energy Manager Web .

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

16 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.2 Login

Change password
You can change your Energy Manager password in the login dialog. To change it, you need
your current password or a temporary password.

Note
You will be separately notified via email regarding a password change. If you have received
such an email, without having changed your password, your user account may have been
hacked. Always contact your administrator in this case.

Note
Unsupported punctuation
Quotation marks are not supported for passwords.

Forgot password
If you have forgotten your password, you can have a temporary password generated. The
temporary password will be sent by email to the email address that is stored in your
Energy Manager user account.
If you have received the email with the temporary password, click "Change password" in the
login dialog.

See also
Introduction (Page 12)
Creating users (Page 228)
Definition of home page (Page 18)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 17
Basics
2.3 Definition of home page

2.3 Definition of home page

Home page of Energy Manager Web

After logging into Energy Manager Web you automatically go to the home page of
Energy Manager Web. Use the Quicklinks or tree topology for navigation. Quicklinks are links
to frequently used objects. An overview of existing Quicklinks is available under the
"Quicklinks" toolbar option. With the help of the tree topology you can navigate through the
object and folder structures within your system. Open the tree topology by clicking on the
"Tree" in the navigation area.
The following figure shows the home page of Energy Manager Web:

① Menu bar
The menu bar consists of the following three menus:
• Tree Select the tree variant to be displayed. You can choose between the following views:
– Standard view
– Organization view
– Location view
• Quicklinks: An overview of all saved Quicklinks is displayed. You can navigate directly to the corresponding ob-
ject via these Quicklinks.
• Service-Cockpit: An overview of the status of the different services as well as log files is displayed. You can start
or stop the services directly in the Service Cockpit.
For more information on the Service Cockpit, refer to the section "Service Cockpit (Page 253)".
• Notification Center: You obtain an overview of the generated alarms and can configure the alarm lists.
For more information on the Service Cockpit, refer to the section "Notification Center (Page 249)".
• Batch analysis: With the batch analysis, you determine the energy consumption of a product per batch.
The batch analysis is not available in the "SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic" version.
• Configuration: You can choose between 2 area options:
– Configure data sources, data points, parameters and MEVAs / KPIs as well as the system settings. You can
find more information on the configuration in the section "Settings (Page 213)".
– Data import: Import measured values of data points from a csv file. For more information on importing
measured values, refer to the section "Importing measured values (Page 68)".
② Logo
The Siemens logo is set by default. You can select your own company-specific logo in the "Web Client settings
(Page 224)".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

18 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.3 Definition of home page

③ Navigation area
In the navigation area, select the objects you want to view or edit. Use the menu items or Quicklinks for navigation.
The folder contents and objects that are available to you in the navigation area depend on your user rights and the
entry point of the respective user group in the Energy Manager Web.
You can find more information on navigation in the section "Navigation (Page 20)".
④ Product name
The product name "Energy Manager Basic" or "Energy Manager PRO" is set by default. You can enter your individual
product name in the "Web Client settings".
⑤ Object search
You can search for objects using an object type filter and an entry field.
You can find more information on the search in the section "Search for object (Page 22)".
⑥ Detail area
Folder contents and objects are displayed in the detail area. The selection in the navigation area determines which
objects are displayed.
⑦ User information
The following information and functions are available:
• Display of the logged-in user name
• Option for switching the Web Client view
• Option for the Energy Manager Web log off
⑧ Product Information
• Displays the installed system version.
• Documentation: Forwards you to the Energy Manager online help.
• Support Forwards you to the Siemens AG Support site.
⑨ Feedback
You can offer comments on SIMATIC Energy Manager here.

See also
Introduction (Page 12)
Login (Page 15)
Creating Quicklinks in the Web (Page 26)
Quicklinks (Page 26)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 19
Basics
2.4 Navigation

2.4 Navigation

Navigation via the menu

All objects enabled for Energy Manager Web are arranged according to the breadcrumb trail
method in the navigation area.
The following figure shows the navigation principle in the navigation area:

① Clicking on the menu item itself displays its structure in the navigation area, as well as its content in the detail area
("Dashboard A" in the example). All remaining menu commands on the same level are hidden.
Clicking on the arrow of a menu item opens and closes its structure again in the navigation area, without updating
or reloading the content of the detail area. When you click on the icon of an object in the navigation area, its struc-
ture (e.g. data points used) is also opened and closed again in the navigation area, without updating the detail area.
② You go back to the previous display by clicking on the parent menu command (in the example "Reports").

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

20 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.4 Navigation

Navigation via Quicklinks

Quicklinks work like bookmarks in Internet browsers. Quicklinks gives you access to
frequently used objects. They are stored as tiles in the "Quicklinks" menu bar item.
You can specify a Quicklink as a home page in Energy Manager Web. The content of the
object to which the Quicklink refers is then displayed upon the next login.
Your personal Quicklink settings are stored and linked to your user account. This means that
your Quicklink settings are available on other PCs.

① Icons and name are copied by default from the object to which the Quicklink refers. You can
edit the Quicklink via the shortcut menu.
② Change Quicklink order
You can drag-and-drop the Quicklinks after activating the Move mode.
③ Add Quicklink
Create a new Quicklink for the object displayed in the detail area.

For longer Quicklink lists, use the scroll bar to view all entries.

See also
Introduction (Page 12)
Creating Quicklinks in the Web (Page 26)
Editing Quicklinks in the Web (Page 28)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 21
Basics
2.5 Search for object

2.5 Search for object

Overview
The Energy Manager search function evaluates the following information:
• Object name
• Description of the object
• Object ID
For measuring points
• Inventory number (KKS number)
For data points

Requirement
You have opened the home page and no object is selected in the navigation tree.

Procedure

1. To limit the search to specific objects, activate one or more object types in the drop-down
menu " " of the search.
You can choose the following objects:
– Report
– Dashboard
– Data point
– Chart
– EEM
– MEVA/KPI
– Matrix
– Folder
– Parameter

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

22 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.5 Search for object

2. Enter your search term in the search field and press Enter.
A preview shows the search results.
If you have selected the "Dashboard" object type and you click in the search field, all
dashboards are displayed even if you input nothing.
3. To open an object, click on the search result in the preview.

Note
If an object is available multiple times in the tree, the first occurrence is opened.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 23
Basics
2.6 Consumers and structured view on the web

2.6 Consumers and structured view on the web

Requirement
• The Consumer functionality is licensed separately.

Overview
In Energy Manager Web, you have the option of having all consumers defined in the
Energy Manager PRO Client displayed by their location or their organization unit.

Procedure
1. If you want to display all consumers of a location, click the "Geographical" tree option in the
menu bar.
2. If you want to display all consumers of an organizational unit, click the "Organisation" tree
option in the menu bar.

Result
1. All consumers of a location are displayed.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

24 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.6 Consumers and structured view on the web

2. All consumers of an organization unit are displayed.

When you click on the icon of a location or organizational unit, the structure of the object
opens and closes in the navigation area. When you click on the writing of the object, the
related Widget Dashboard is displayed in the detail area. The administrator sets the definition
and configuration of this Widget Dashboard in the consumer templates.

See also
Navigation (Page 20)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 25
Basics
2.7 Quicklinks

2.7 Quicklinks

2.7.1 Creating Quicklinks in the Web

Overview
In Energy Manager Web you create Quicklinks to frequently used objects.

Requirement
• You have the functional authorizations "Quicklinks create" and "Quicklinks configure".

Procedure
1. Place the cursor over the object in the tree topology of the navigation area for which you
want to create a Quicklink.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3. Click on the menu command "Add Quicklink".

The "Edit Quicklink" configuration dialog opens.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

26 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.7 Quicklinks

4. The name of the object for which the Quicklink is created is applied by default.
Alternatively, you can rename the Quicklink.
5. To specify the Quicklink as the start page, select the "Use as Startpage" check box.
6. To create the Quicklink, click on the "Save" button.
Alternatively, you can add a Quicklink using the Add option of the Quicklink dialog.

A Quicklink is then created for the object opened in the detail area.

Result
The Quicklink is created as follows:
• The object name is adopted.
• The corresponding object icon is applied.

See also
Definition of home page (Page 18)
Navigation (Page 20)
Editing Quicklinks in the Web (Page 28)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 27
Basics
2.7 Quicklinks

2.7.2 Editing Quicklinks in the Web

Overview
You can change the order of the Quicklinks in the "Quicklinks" area. If you no longer require
Quicklinks, you can delete the Quicklinks again. You can also customize the Quicklinks, for
example, by changing the name.

Requirement
• You have the functional authorizations "Quicklinks configure" and "Quicklinks delete".

Changing the order of the Quicklinks

1. Click on the menu item "Quicklinks".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

28 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Basics
2.7 Quicklinks

2. Enable Move mode " " of the Quicklink dialog option, located at the top right.

3. To move a Quicklink, use drag-and-drop to place it at the required position.

The Quicklink is placed at the respective location.

4. Click on "OK".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 29
Basics
2.7 Quicklinks

Customize Quicklink
1. Place the cursor over the Quicklink that you want to edit.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right side of the Quicklink.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The context menu opens.

3. Click on the menu command "Edit".

The "Edit Quicklink" dialog box opens.

4. To rename the Quicklink, enter the desired name in the "Name" entry field.
5. To specify the Quicklink as the start page, select the "Use as Startpage" check box.

Note
If you do not specify any Quicklink as homepage, the first Quicklink in the "Quicklinks"
area is used as homepage page.

6. Click on the "Save" button.

Delete Quicklink
1. Place the cursor over the Quicklink that you want to edit.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right side of the Quicklink.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The context menu opens.
3. Click on the menu command "Delete".
The Quicklink is deleted.

See also
Navigation (Page 20)
Creating Quicklinks in the Web (Page 26)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

30 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
Data analysis 3
3.1 Folder
Overview
In Energy Manager Web you can see all folders and their contents which were defined by the
administrator as an entry point for you. The available options depend on the user rights of
the respective user group to which you are assigned. The administrator configures the user
rights of the user groups in the Energy Manager PRO Client.

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
In Energy Manager Basic the following entry point is always used for the user:
"Energy Manager - Web".

View folder contents

1. Click on the entry point ("Energy Manager - Web") in the navigation area.
2. Click the folder whose contents you want to see.

Result
The content of the desired folder is displayed in the detail area. You can learn how to create,
edit and delete new folders in the section "Configuration of analysis objects" in the section
"Folder".

See also
Creating users (Page 228)
Creating folders (Page 133)
Folders (Page 133)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 31
Data analysis
3.2 Widget dashboards

3.2 Widget dashboards

3.2.1 Overview of Widget Dashboards

Widget Dashboards allow rapid visualization of a wide variety of plant data on a single page.
Widget Dashboards are designed for display in the Web or on mobile devices. For this reason,
only configure Widget Dashboards in Energy Manager Web. In the
Energy Manager PRO Client you can only create and delete Widget Dashboards.

Note
The functional authorization "Widgets/Dashboards - create, remove, configure" is required to
create, delete and configure a Widget Dashboard. In addition, the "view" authorization is
available for displaying and "configure" solely for the configuration.

Requirements
• The Widget Dashboard is created in Energy Manager.
• The Widget Dashboard is enabled for the user.

Display of Widget Dashboards

To open a Widget Dashboard in Energy Manager Web, click in the navigation area on the
corresponding Widget Dashboard. The Widget Dashboard is displayed in the detail area.

① Name of the dashboard

② Changing the observation period
③ Shortcut menu of the dashboard

When you click on ③, the shortcut menu of the dashboard is displayed.

① Adjust dashboard layout

② Edit dashboard
③ Add widget

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

32 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.2 Widget dashboards

Click on the "Edit dashboard" button ② to configure generally applicable settings of the
Widget Dashboard. You can find more information on configuring widgets in the section
"Editing Dashboards".
To create new widgets in the Widget Dashboard, click on the "Add Widget" button ③ in the
shortcut menu of the dashboard. For more information on creating widgets, refer to the
section "Creating widgets".

Displaying widgets in the Widget Dashboard

The following figure shows a created and already configured Chart widget in the layout
Adjust mode of the Widget Dashboard ①:

• You move the widget using drag and drop.

• You resize the widget with the blue frame.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 33
Data analysis
3.2 Widget dashboards

When you close Adjust mode of the Widget Dashboard by pressing the "Finish" button, the
widget is displayed in the selected size and position in the Widget Dashboard. The following
figure shows the same Widget Dashboard after closing the Adjust mode:

① Detail view of the widget

② Shortcut menu of the widget
③ Zoom buttons

In the detail view ①, you can alternatively define the display information about the widgets,
depending on the widget.

The following additional display information is available:

• Widget:
Displays the main information of the widget.
• History:
Displays the values of the data points as a chart in the defined observation period.
• Histogram:
Displays the values as a histogram with equal intervals. The display corresponds to the
histogram in the Energy Manager PRO Client. In addition, the statistical values minimum,
maximum, median, average and standard deviation are displayed. Values outside the
plausibility limits are not marked in the histogram.
• Regression:
Shows the correlation and regression analysis as well as the linear correlation as a
formula.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

34 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.2 Widget dashboards

For information on how to configure the individual widgets using the respective sections,
refer to section "Widget configuration".
The left Zoom button ③ activates Zoom-in mode. In this mode, you zoom in on the area you
select in the widget history. The right Zoom button ③ resets the widget history to the
preceding view.
When you click on the button ② of the widget, the shortcut menu of the dashboard is
displayed.

① Edit widget settings

② Delete widget
③ Export data

With the CSV Export icon ③, you can export the measured values for a widget as a CSV file to
the download directory of your Internet browser. The export file is saved with the name
"EnMPRO_dashboardname_widgetname.csv".

Changing the observation period

To change the observation period of the dashboard and the widgets contained therein,
follow these steps:
1. Click on the field of the date or query type of the dashboard at the top of the dashboard.

2. Select the (start) date and time.

3. Select the query type associated with the start time.
4. Click on the "OK" button.
The observation period of the Dashboard adapts to your settings. If you have selected the
check box "Use dashboard settings" in the configuration settings of the widgets as the query
type, the observation period of the widgets changes accordingly.

Note
If you have selected a particular date including query type in the configuration settings of a
widget, the observation period of the widget in question does not change.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 35
Data analysis
3.2 Widget dashboards

3.2.2 Widget Dashboards for consumers

Requirement
• The license for the Consumer functionality is available.

Overview
You have the option of creating Widget Dashboards for individual consumers as well as for
entire locations or organization units. The functionality of selecting associated datapoints and
MEVAs for consumers is available. When you assign a consumer to a consumer template in
the Energy Manager PRO Client and define a default Widget Dashboard, this Widget
Dashboard is displayed when you click on the consumer. You can then configure this Widget
Dashboard. More information about creating a consumer and a consumer template can be
found in the sections "Consumers and structured view "and "Consumer templates" in the
complete operating manual of Energy Manager PRO.
If you want to view the entire consumer structure in Energy Manager Web, copy the
consumer to the entry point defined for the user group.

Opening the Widget Dashboard for consumers

To open the Widget Dashboard for consumers, follow these steps:
1. In the navigation area, click under the menu item "Geographical" or "Organisation" on the
consumer whose Widget Dashboard you wish to display.

The default Widget Dashboard in the Energy Manager PRO Client is opened.
2. To open the configuration mode, click on the gear icon.
3. In the "Data source" tab, select the check box "Consumer variable".
Only data points and MEVAs of the consumer are listed.

Note
If you create the Widget Dashboard at the geographical or organization unit level, the data
points and MEVAS of all consumers located below are available for selection. You thus
have the option of designing a Widget Dashboard as an overview of all consumers of a
location or an organization unit.

4. Select the data points and MEVAS you want to display in the widget.
5. Complete the configuration of the widget in accordance with section "Widget
configuration".
If you have created multiple Widget Dashboards for a consumer, they are displayed in the
tree topology of the navigation area below the consumer.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

36 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.2 Widget dashboards

Use of placeholders for designations

When configuring the Widget Dashboard you have the option of using placeholders. These
placeholders are replaced with specific names or descriptions. You can use the placeholders
in the title of the dashboard, in the title of a widget and in the widget "text" as well as in the
text itself.
You can use the following placeholders:
• {MACHINE_NAME} corresponds to the name of the consumer
• {MACHINE_DESCRIPTION} corresponds to the description of the consumer
• {MACHINE_PRODUCER} corresponds to the producer of the consumer
• {MACHINE_TEMPLATE} corresponds to the name of the consumer template
• {MACHINE_LOCATION} corresponds to the location of the consumer
• {MACHINE_BALANCING_GROUP} corresponds to the organization unit of the consumer
• {ORG_NAME} corresponds to the name of the organization unit
• {ORG_DESCRIPTION} corresponds to the description of the organization unit
• {LOCATION_NAME} corresponds to the name of the location
• {LOCATION_DESCRIPTION} corresponds to the description of the location
• {LOCATION_LOCATION} corresponds to the "Location" entry field in Location
Use the expressions including the curly brackets.

See also
Setting up dashboards (Page 76)
Configuring the Parameter section (Page 99)
Widget configuration (Page 95)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 37
Data analysis
3.3 Online Monitoring

3.3 Online Monitoring

Online Monitoring enables you to display data points of Modbus devices and OPC channels in
real time. The sections Creating a Modbus TCP channel (Page 165) and Creating OPC DA, OPC
HDA, OPCUA channels (Page 156) describe how to configure the Online Monitoring for
Modbus devices and OPC channels.
You can find all data points with Online Monitoring in the navigation field under the structure
"Web Konfiguration > Monitoring".

This folder structure is also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client. However, in Energy
Manager PRO Client you cannot make any changes to the objects in the folder "Monitoring".
To open Online Monitoring, click on the corresponding entry.

Configuration
Under "Configuration", configure the Online Monitoring. You can activate the following
functions for each data point:
• Display in chart: The corresponding data point is displayed in the Online Monitoring chart.
You can activate this function for a maximum of 10 data points at the same time.
• Archive data: The values of the data point are saved for Online Monitoring for 62 days.
Historical values are displayed in the chart only for these data points. When you deactivate
this function, already archived data are not deleted.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

38 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.3 Online Monitoring

Note
A maximum of 1000 data points per acquisition component and a maximum of 25 data
points per device can be simultaneously archived.

The data points are displayed in tabular form:

The table contains the following six columns:

Column Function
Name Name of the data point
Unit Unit of the value of the data point
Value Current value of the data point
This value is updated in the acquisition cycle of Online Monitoring.
Show in chart: If this option is selected, the corresponding data point is shown in the Online Moni-
toring chart:
Archive data If this option is activated, the values of the corresponding data point is saved for 62
days.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 39
Data analysis
3.3 Online Monitoring

Chart
The data points selected under "Configuration"are graphically displayed under "Chart".

① Visualizing the data points

To observe a specific area, keeping the mouse pointer pressed draw a frame around the desired area.
To reset the display, click on the "Reset zoom" button at the top right-hand corner of the chart.
② Selection of the displayed time period
If you select a time period while the online mode is activated, the online mode is deactivated.
③ Online mode
While the online mode is activated, the current minute and the past 14 minutes are always displayed in the chart.
④ Legend
To hide a data point, click on the corresponding data point in the legend.
Click on the data point again to display it again.

Note
If you select a time period with a large number of measured values, loading the chart make
take a considerable amount of time.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

40 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.4 Reports

3.4 Reports

Overview
Energy Manager PRO Web shows you the reports you configured in Energy Manager
PRO Client. You can also generate new reports in Energy Manager Web .

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
In Energy Manager Basic you can create reports only with the help of five predefined
templates. All the settings are predefined in these report templates.

The structure of a report result in Energy Manager Web consists of the following objects:

① Report
When you select the report object, the following lower-level object types are displayed in a drop-down menu:
• Data point
• MEVA / KPI
• Parameter
② Report results
③ Output format of the report result with preview
④ Delete option for the report result
⑤ Create new report for this period

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 41
Data analysis
3.4 Reports

The figure below shows an example of the periodically categorized report results in the detail
view.

Report creation is based on the configuration for automatic reporting.

Requirement
• The report has been created in Energy Manager .
• The report has been released for the current Web application.
• Microsoft Excel and PDF-Reader are installed on the PC.
• You have the necessary rights.
– "start" to generate report results.
– "open *" to display / open report results in the respective format.
– "delete" to delete report results.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

42 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.4 Reports

Generating a report in the Energy Manager Web

1. To generate the report in Energy Manager Web , select the desired report and then click the
"Options" tab in the right window pane.
The "Create new report" dialog opens.
2. Under "General", specify the time range for the report.
3. Click on "Advanced Options" to define the additional parameters for report generation.
Define the desired parameters.
4. Click "Start".
The report is generated.

① Configure the time range of the report in this area.

② Configure the advanced options of the report in this area.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 43
Data analysis
3.4 Reports

Specifying additional parameters for the report (optional)

1. Click "Advanced Options" in the " Create new report" dialog.
The advanced options are displayed.
2. Under "Country", select the desired country.
3. To define the compression level of the report, disable "Dynamic compression level" and
select the desired compression level.
4. To define the version of the measured values for evaluation, disable "Current version" and
select a date.
All measured values generated prior to the selected date are evaluated.
The current date is activated by default.
5. To define a calculation model for evaluation of the report, disable "Current model" and select
a model date.
The report is evaluated with the current calculation model by default.
6. To exclude the report from a cyclic deletion action, disable "Auto delete".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

44 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.4 Reports

Downloading or displaying the report result in Energy Manager Web

1. To download the report result in PDF format, click on the "PDF-Download" icon in the row of
the report result.
The report result is downloaded.
2. To download the report result in Excel format, click on the "EXCEL-Download" icon in the
row of the report result.
The report result is downloaded.

Note
If you change the result of the downloaded report, these changes are not saved in Energy
Manager.

3. To display the report result as a preview in PDF format in Energy Manager Web , click on the
"Preview" icon.
The report result is displayed.

Deleting a report result

1. To delete a report result, click on the " " button in the "Delete" column in the table with the
report results.
A confirmation prompt appears.
2. Confirm the deletion.
The report result is deleted.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 45
Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

3.5 Diagrams

3.5.1 Overview
You use the Chart to display historical as well as current values. Use the chart for the
visualization of measurement series.
The Diagram or Chart functionality is available as a separate tab for the following objects:
• Data point
• Matrix
• Chart object

Chart tab for matrices and data points

With matrices and data points, the Chart tab is available immediately after a click on the
respective object. Configurations set in the chart, such as the number of displayed data
points and the query type, are stored automatically for the active user. The configuration is
saved with the object in the database. The selected time range is not stored. On a renewed
display of the chart the current time range is always displayed.

Own chart object

There is also a separate chart object that you can use to visualize up to ten data points
simultaneously. The configuration via the chart object is not referenced to a user. Thus it is
possible to make a preconfigured chart available to several users. Open the chart by clicking
on the corresponding chart in the navigation area.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

46 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Structure of the Chart tab

The following figure shows the display of the chart in Energy Manager Web:

① Selection of the "Chart" tab

② Selection of the "Alarms" tab
③ Selection of the "Comments" tab
④ Selection of the "Values" tab
⑤ Data point with a warning
⑥ Name of the chart and displayed time period
⑦ Selection of the displayed time period
To change the time period, click on the arrow keys or . When you click , you open the time and date selection.
You can find more information about time and date selection below.
When the page is reloaded, the chart once again displays the time period specified by the configuration.
⑧ Selection of the displayed compression level
⑨ Exporting the chart
You can export the displayed chart in the following form:
• The values of the chart that are displayed at this time are saved as a file in "*.csv" format
⑩ Configuration of the chart
To open the "Data sources" tab of the configuration, click on .
To open the "General" tab of the configuration, click on .

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 47
Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

⑪ Visualizing the data points

To observe a specific area, keeping the mouse pointer pressed draw a frame around the desired area.
To reset the display, click on the "Reset zoom" button at the top right-hand corner of the chart.
⑫ Data points with legend
⑬ Data points outside of limits

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

48 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Date and time selection

The following figure shows the date and time selection.

① Selection of the displayed month

To display another month in the calendar, proceed as follows:
1. Click on the text with the month and year displayed.
2. Select a year.
3. Select a month.
To display the previous or next month, click the arrow buttons.
To select the current time period, click on .
② Selection of the displayed time period.
To display a time period on the chart, click a day in the calendar. The corresponding time period
is selected automatically.
If you selected the Ad-Hoc query type, select the start and end of the custom time period.
③ Selection of the query type
To display a time period with a user-defined start and end on the chart, select the "Ad-Hoc"
option.
④ Selection of the time
This function is only supported with the "Ad-Hoc" query type.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 49
Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Adding comments
If you double-click a value in the diagram, the following dialog box opens:

① Time stamp of creation of the comment

② Comment (details hidden)
To display the details of the comment, click the comment.
③ Selected value
Count value of the selected value.
④ Time stamp of the selected value
⑤ "Show all" button
Click this button to show the details of all comments.
⑥ "New comment" button
Click this button to add a new comment to the selected value.
⑦ "Hide all" button
Click this button to hide the details of all comments.
⑧ "Delete" button
Click this button to delete the comment.
⑨ Author
Author of comment
⑩ Comment
Edit or write the comment in this input field.
⑪ "Save" button
Click this button to leave the dialog box and save the changes.
⑫ "Cancel" button
Click this button to leave the dialog box and not save the changes.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

50 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Display of details in the chart

The figure below shows which details are displayed for the measured values of a
measurement series in the chart:

① Details
Move the mouse pointer over the corresponding measured value to display the details of a
measured value. The following information is included:
• Data point name
• Time stamp
• Value
• Comments
② Measured value with comment
Measured value with comments are marked with a hash character.
③ Measured value outside warning levels
Measured values which have exceeded the warning levels defined in the chart configuration are
marked with a yellow dot.
④ Data point outside limits
Measured values which have exceeded the limits defined in the chart configuration are marked
with a purple dot.

Note
If a value displayed as a column exceeds or falls below a limit or warning value, the entire
column is colored accordingly.

Note
If a series is displayed as a bar chart, the diamonds that show comments are not visible for
that series.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 51
Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Structure of the Alarms tab

A list with all the alarms for the shown period is displayed using the "Alarm" tab.
The display table consists of the following five columns:

Column Function
Name of the series Name of the data point relating to the message
Time stamp of The time of measurement
measuring point
Time stamp of The time of creation of the message
creation
Level Message type
Comment Comment on the message
This comment is created automatically

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.
When you enter a text in the "Filter" text box, all columns are searched and the corresponding
entries are displayed in the display table. Delimitation of messages is recommended when
there is a large number of messages.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

52 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Structure of the Comments tab

A list with all the comments for the displayed period is displayed using the "Comments" tab.

① Edit
To edit the selected comment, click on this button.
If you selected several comments, this button is disabled.
② Table with comments of the selected time period.
③ Filter function
When you enter a text in the "Filter" text box, all columns are searched and the corresponding entries are displayed
in the display table. Delimitation of comments is recommended when there is a large number of comments.
④ Delete
To delete a comment, select the comment and double-click this button.
Multiple selection is possible.

The table contains the following four columns:

Column Function
Name of the series Name of the data point relating to the comment
Time stamp of Time stamp of the measurement
measuring point
Comment Content of comment
Author Author of comment

Values tab
You can find more information on the Values tab in the Matrices section.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 53
Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

3.5.2 Configuring charts

Follow these steps to configure a chart:
1. Click on the chart in the navigation field.
2. To open the configuration dialog, click on .
3. Configure the tabs of the configuration dialog as described below.
4. Click the "Save" button.

Configuring the "General" tab

To configure the "General" tab, follow these steps:
1. Enter the name of the chart in the "Name" text box.
2. Enter the number of decimal places to be displayed in the detail field of a measuring point in
the "Decimal format" text box.
3. If you enable "Current date", the current time is always used as the basis for the query type.
If you disable "Current date", a defined time is used as the basis for the query type.
In this case, select the time in the text box "From".
4. From the "Query type" drop-down list, select the type of the displayed time period.
5. From the "Compression" drop-down list, select the compression level to be displayed in the
chart.
6. If you enter a number other than zero in the "Offset" text box, the chart will not display the
selected time period. The displayed time period is shifted by offset times the cycle of the
query type. For example, if you have selected Month as the query type and an offset of -2,
the chart will display March instead of May.
7. If you enable "Use initial time stamp", the values at the beginning of your cycle are displayed
in the chart.
Background: The end time stamp is always used in the Energy Manager. End time
stamping means that all values get the time stamp at the end time of their cycle. This
means, for example, that the first daily value of a month is stamped at midnight on the
second day of the month. Accordingly, the last daily value of a month has a time stamp of
midnight of the first day of the following month. These values are also displayed in the
chart if you have not activated "Use initial time stamp".
8. To compare the time period displayed in the chart with another time period, enable
"Comparison", "Static" or "Dynamic".
If you have enabled "Static", select the start of the period to be compared from the
calendar under "From". This time period does not change.
If you have enabled "Dynamic", enter a number in the "Offset" text box. The period to be
compared is offset from the displayed period by a multiple of the cycle of the query type.
The function is the same as in step 6.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

54 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Configuring the "Data sources" tab

To configure the "Data sources" tab, follow these steps:
1. To add a data point or MEVA/KPI, select the object from the "Select" drop-down list. When
you enter a term in the drop-down list, the displayed objects are filtered by that term.
The only objects displayed in the drop-down list are of a type enabled under "Filter".
Alternatively, you can use the structure browser. To open the Structure Browser, click on
.

Note
You can display values in the chart that are stored locally on the acquisition component.
This data is deleted from the acquisition component 62 days after it is created and can
then no longer be displayed in the chart.

2. To configure a selected object for the chart, click on the object in the "Currently selected"
list.
You can enter an alternative name. If you enabled the option button in the corresponding
row, the alternative name or description of the object is displayed as the name of the data
series in the chart.
Under "Category", select the category of values to be displayed in the chart. The
conversion between energy/consumption and power/flow is made automatically.
From the"Function" drop-down list, select the type of values of the object are to be
displayed in the chart
3. To delete an object from the chart, click on .

Configuring the "Display" tab

To configure the "Display" tab, proceed as follows:
1. To configure the display of an object in the chart, click on the corresponding object.
2. From the "Color" drop-down list, select the color with which the values of the object are to
be displayed in the chart.
3. From the "Type" drop-down list, select the way in which the values of the object are to be
displayed in the chart.
4. From the "Y-axis" drop-down list, select the y-axis to which the object is assigned in the
chart.
5. If you disable "Visible", the object is not displayed in the chart.
6. If you enable "Stacked", all objects where this option is enabled and assigned to the same
axis are displayed stacked on top of each other.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 55
Data analysis
3.5 Diagrams

Configuring the "Limits" tab

To configure the "Limits" tab, follow these steps:
1. To configure the limits of an object's values on the chart, click on the object.
2. In the "Upper warning" text box, enter the numeric value of the upper limit.
3. In the "Upper warning" text box, enter the numeric value of the upper warning limit.
4. In the "Lower warning" text box, enter the numerical value of the lower warning limit.
5. In the "Lower limit" text box, enter the numerical value of the lower limit.
To successfully configure the limits, adhere to the following nonequivalence: Upper limit ≥
Upper limit warning ≥ Lower limit warning ≥ Lower limit

Configuring the "Axes" tab

To configure the "Axes" tab, proceed as follows:
1. To add a new y-axis, click on .
2. To configure an axis, click on the corresponding axis.
In the "Name" text box, enter the name of the axis. The name of the axis is displayed in
the chart.
In the "Lower limit" text box, enter the lowest numerical value on the axis that is displayed
in the chart. If you leave this box empty, the axis is automatically scaled.
With the "Area" display type, the chart is always displayed in the zero-point display.
In the "Upper limit" text box, enter the highest numerical value on the axis that is
displayed in the chart. This numerical value must be greater than the lowest numerical
value on the axis. If you leave this box empty, the axis is automatically scaled.
3. To delete an axis, click on .

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

56 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
Manual data acquisition 4
4.1 Datapoints
Overview
A datapoint serves to store measured values. In Energy Manager PRO Web you can see all the
data points that were defined in the client under the entry point. Restrictions can exist with
regard to the user rights.

Procedure
1. Click on the data point whose value you want to display.

The detail area opens.

2. You can adapt the settings in the detail area. The datapoint values for the selected settings
are shown in the detail area.
With datapoints, the Chart tab is available immediately after a click on the respective
object.

① Selection of the "Chart" tab

② Selection of the "Alarms" tab
③ Selection of the "Comments" tab
④ Selection of the "Values" tab

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 57
Manual data acquisition
4.1 Datapoints

⑤ Selection of the displayed time period

To change the time period, click on the arrow keys or . By clicking on , you open the time and date selection.
You can find more information on the time and date selection in the Charts section.
⑥ Selection of the displayed compression level
⑦ Table with the values of the datapoint and the time stamps of the values.
⑧ Edit a value.
Click this button to open the dialog in which you can change the value. You cannot change the entry of the "Sum"
field in the dialog of a counter value.

Values tab
Value changes made in the table are automatically saved in the datapoint. The selected time
range is not saved.
On a renewed display of the dialog, the current time range is always displayed.

Chart, Alarms and Comments tabs

You can find more information on the Chart, Alarms and Comments tabs in the Charts
section.

See also
Creating data points (Page 181)
Data point (Page 179)
Configuration of the data points (Page 182)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

58 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Manual data acquisition
4.2 Parameter

4.2 Parameter

Overview
With a parameter you can acquire a fixed value that is generally valid or whose validity period
is limited by the entry of a time range. You can, for example, define electricity or gas prices
for specific periods or specify conversion factors such as a CO2 conversion factor.
The entry of a parameter value in the Energy Manager PRO Client corresponds to the entry in
Energy Manager Web.

Parameter value overview

Click on the parameter in the navigation area, for which you want to view, enter or edit a
value.
In the detail area you can see an overview of the configured validity periods, including the
parameter and default values.

① Name of the parameter

② Default value of the parameter
③ Validity periods and parameter values
④ Add new value

Editing the default value

1. To change the default value of the parameter, click the " " button in the parameter detail
area.
The "Edit default" dialog opens.
2. Enter the default value.
3. Select the desired unit.
4. Click the "Save" button.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 59
Manual data acquisition
4.2 Parameter

Adding a validity period and parameter value

1. To define a new validity period including a parameter value, click on the "Add new value"
button.
The "New parameter value" dialog opens.
2. Enter a value.
3. Select the desired validity period.
4. Click on the "Save" button.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

60 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Manual data acquisition
4.2 Parameter

Editing the validity period and parameter value

1. To change an existing validity period including a parameter value, click on the " " button.
The "Edit parameter value" dialog box opens.
2. Enter a value.
3. Select the desired validity period.
4. Click on the "Save" button.

Deleting the validity period and parameter value

To delete an existing validity period including a parameter value, click on the " " button.
The entry is deleted.

See also
Creating parameters (Page 201)
Parameters (Page 199)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 61
Manual data acquisition
4.3 Matrices

4.3 Matrices

4.3.1 Overview
The matrix allows you to display both historical and current values as numbers in a table.
Besides that,
you change the values via the Matrix.
The matrix or value functionality is available as a separate tab for the following objects:
• Data point
• Matrix
• Chart object

Configuring the Values tab for data points and chart objects
In contrast to datapoints and chart objects, the Values tab page in the matrix is available
immediately after you click on the relevant object. Value changes made in the matrix are
automatically saved in the data point. The selected time range is not saved. When the matrix
is displayed again, the current time range is always displayed. You cannot configure the
matrix of these objects.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

62 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Manual data acquisition
4.3 Matrices

Layout of the Values tab

The following figure shows a representation of the matrix in the Energy Manager Web:

① Selection of the "Values" tab

② Selection of the "Chart" tab
③ Selection of the "Alarms" tab
④ Selection of the "Comments" tab
⑤ Selection of the displayed time period
To change the time period, click on the arrow keys or . By clicking on , you open the time and date selection.
You can find more information on time and date selection in the Charts section.
⑥ Selection of the displayed compression level
⑦ Configuration of the matrix
To open the matrix configuration, click on .
⑧ Table with the values of the data points and the time stamps of the values.
⑨ Edit a value.
If you click on this button, the dialog opens where you can change the value.
You cannot change the entry of the "Sum" field in the dialog of a counter value.
You cannot change values of MEVAs/KPIs.

Chart, Alarms and Comments tabs

You can find more information on the Chart, Alarms and Comments tabs in the Charts
section.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 63
Manual data acquisition
4.3 Matrices

4.3.2 Configuring matrices

To configure a matrix, proceed as follows:
1. Click on the matrix in the navigation field.
2. To open the configuration dialog, click on .
3. Configure the tabs of the configuration dialog as described below.
4. Click on the "Save" button.

Figure 4-1 Configuration dialog

Configuring the "General" tab

To configure the "General" tab, follow these steps:
1. In the "Name" text box, enter the name of the matrix.
2. Enter the description of the matrix in the "Description" text box.
3. Adjust the "Correction Status" if necessary.
Possible correction status with the respective explanation can be found in the section
"Correction status of a value (Page 265)".
4. In the "Decimal places" text box, enter the number of decimal places displayed in the matrix.
5. If you enable "Allow only data view", you cannot change any values in the matrix.
6. If you enable "Plausibility check", the values in the matrix that violate the plausibility limits
configured in the data point are highlighted accordingly.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

64 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Manual data acquisition
4.3 Matrices

7. If you enable "Transposed data presentation", the time stamps are displayed above the
columns and the data points above the rows.
8. If you enable "Current date", the current values are always displayed in the matrix.
9. If the "Current date" is not enabled, enter the time from which values are displayed in the
matrix in the "From" box.
10.From the "Query type" drop-down list, select the period to be displayed.
11.From the "Compression" drop-down list, select the compression level to be displayed.
12.If you enter a number other than zero in the "Offset" text box, the matrix will not display the
selected time period. The displayed time period is shifted by offset times the cycle of the
query type. For example, if you have selected the Month query type and an offset of -2, the
matrix displays March instead of May.
13.If you enable "Acyclic", the values are not assigned to a cycle. This option is useful for
matrices with data points without an acquisition cycle.
14.If "Acyclic" is disabled, select the cycle in which the values of the data points are displayed
from the "Cycle" drop-down list.

Configuring the "Data Source" tab

To configure the "Data source" tab, follow these steps:
1. To add a data point, select the object from the "Select" drop-down list. When you enter a
term in the drop-down list, the displayed objects are filtered by that term.
The only objects displayed in the drop-down list are of a type enabled under "Filter".
Alternatively, you can use the structure browser. To open the Structure Browser, click on
.

Note
You can display values in the matrix that are stored locally on the acquisition component.
This data is deleted by the acquisition component 62 days after its creation and can then
no longer be displayed in the matrix.

2. To configure a selected object for the matrix, click on the object in the "Currently selected"
list.
You can enter an alternative name. If you enable the option button in the corresponding
row, the alternative name or description of the object is displayed as the name of the data
series in the matrix.
3. To delete an object from the chart, click on .

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 65
Manual data acquisition
4.4 Setting up mobile data acquisition with the SIMATIC Energy Manager app for iOS and Android

4.4 Setting up mobile data acquisition with the SIMATIC Energy

Manager app for iOS and Android

Overview
In addition to manual data acquisition in Energy Manager and Energy Manager Web, you can
acquire data manually using the SIMATIC Energy Manager App. With the Energy Manager App
you manually acquire measured values (e g. energy data),which are then transferred to
Energy Manager for further analyses. The measured values are synchronized via encrypted
communication (https) with Energy Manager. To acquire count values in the Energy Manager
App, you need a configured reading route. You configure this reading route in Energy
Manager. After logging into the Energy Manager App, the app downloads the approved
reading routes from Energy Manager and displays these reading routes. In addition to the
reading route, the app also applies the appropriately configured data points as well as their
main plausibility settings.

Requirements
• The user has the functional right "Matrix".
• The user has the functional right "Measurement".

Procedure
To configure a reading route for manual acquisition with the Energy Manager App, follow
these steps:
1. Create a Matrix object with a meaningful name.
You can find more information in the section "Manual acquisition with the matrix".
2. Create a data point of the "Counter" category below the matrix object:
You can find more information in the section "Creating a data point".
3. Create a valid counter for the data point.
You can find more information in the section "Configuring counters".
4. Define your limits below the plausibility settings of the data point.
You can find more information in the section "Configuring the plausibility".
5. Add the matrix object as a Quicklink.
You can find more information in the section "Quicklinks".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

66 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Manual data acquisition
4.4 Setting up mobile data acquisition with the SIMATIC Energy Manager app for iOS and Android

Result
The reading route for manually entering the counter values in the Energy Manager App is
configured. Quick links of the "Route" data type are available in the "Mobile acquisition"
interface of the app. If no Quicklinks have been created in Energy Manager yet, a message
appears in the app.
The following figure shows four Quicklinks from the Energy Manager App:
You can find more information on the Energy Manager App including data acquisition using
the app in the "SIMATIC Energy Manager" manual.

See also
Creating Quicklinks in the Web (Page 26)
Creating data points (Page 181)
Configuring counters (Page 187)
Configuring the plausibility settings (Page 189)
Creating matrices (Page 130)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 67
Manual data acquisition
4.5 Importing measured values

4.5 Importing measured values

Overview
In Energy Manager Web you have the option of importing measured values for one or more
data points in CSV format. A wizard guides you through the import procedure.

Note
If a timestamp is already present in a datapoint, the time stamp and its value are overwritten
during the import.

Note
• The decimal delimiter between the individual numbers in the import file depends on the
language with which you logged in to Energy Manager Web:
– German: The decimal places are separated from the integer with ","; "." is ignored.
– English: The decimal places are separated from the integer with "."; "," is ignored.
Login to Energy Manager Web in the language in which the import file was generated.
• The time stamp in the import file depends on the language with which you logged in to
Energy Manager Web:
– German: dd.MM.yyyy hh:mm:ss - 24-hour format
– English: MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss - 12-hour format
The columns in the import file are separated by ";" in German and in English.

Requirements
• The data points are set up in Energy Manager .
• The measured values are available in a CSV file.
• The measured values are available in UTC time format.
• The interval between timestamps corresponds to the configured acquisition cycle of the
data point.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

68 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Manual data acquisition
4.5 Importing measured values

Procedure
To import measured values for one or more data point(s) in Energy Manager Web, follow
these steps:
1. Click on the settings icon in the menu bar.

Note
The icon for data import is only available in the home area.

2. Click on the "Import" button in the opened settings menu bar.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 69
Manual data acquisition
4.5 Importing measured values

3. Click the "Select file to upload" button in the detail area.

4. Select the required file.

The following figure shows the content of a valid import file.

Note
Make sure that the name of the data point in the CSV file and the name of the data point
in Energy Manager match.

The content of the selected file is automatically checked. The result of the check is
displayed.
5. To start the data import, click on the "Import data" button.

The result of the data import is summarized.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

70 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Manual data acquisition
4.5 Importing measured values

6. If you want to view the imported data, click on the "Show imported data" button.
The values are displayed graphically on a separate web page.
7. If you want to save the summary as a file, click the "Save Logfile" button.

Result
The measured values for the corresponding data point are imported.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 71
Configuration of the analysis objects 5
5.1 Shortcut menu

Overview
You use the shortcut menu of Edit mode to manage the system structure in Energy Manager
Web by creating new objects and configuring existing objects.

Note
Newly created objects and object configurations in Energy Manager PRO Web are also applied
in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

The shortcut menu of the editing mode consists of the following menu commands:
• Edit
• Delete
• Cut
• Copy
• Add dashboard
• Add report
• Add chart
• Add matrix
• Add folder
• Add Quicklink

Note
When you place the cursor over a dashboard, report, chart or matrix in edit mode, an edit
icon is displayed on the right side of the menu item instead of the shortcut menu icon. When
you click on the edit icon, the corresponding configuration dialog opens where you configure
the selected object.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

72 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.1 Shortcut menu

Shortcut menu of folders

To open the shortcut menu of edit mode, follow these steps:
1. Place the cursor over an object in the navigation area.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right side of the menu item.

2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.

The shortcut menu of edit mode opens.

Note
Objects that are not folders have only the following options in the shortcut menu of the
navigation area: Edit, Delete, Cut, Copy, Add Quicklink.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 73
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.2 Tree configuration

5.2 Tree configuration

Overview
You manage the system structure in Energy Manager Web using the structure tree in the
navigation area.
You can use the shortcut menu functions "Copy", "Cut" and "Delete" to restructure objects in
the tree within a folder or move objects to other folders.

Note
Structure changes in Energy Manager PRO Web are also applied in the Energy Manager PRO
Client and vice versa.

Opening configuration options

To use the configuration options of the navigation area, follow these steps:
1. Place the cursor over the object in the navigation area that you want to rearrange or delete.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right side of the menu item.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu of the object is displayed.

3. Click on the relevant configuration option.

Edit mode of the tree is enabled.
The following table shows an overview of the existing configuration tools of objects and their
function:

Configuration tool Function

Delete object Deletes the selected object from the system.
Caution: Deletion cannot be undone.
Delete shortcut Deletes the selected object shortcut from the system.
Cut Cuts the selected object from the current folder. You then paste the cut ob-
ject at a different position in the navigation area.
Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard. You then paste the selected ob-
ject at a different position in the navigation area.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

74 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.2 Tree configuration

Positioning options for the Copy and Cut functions

When you use the "Copy" and "Cut" configuration options, the following position
functionalities are enabled in the tree.

Configuration tool Function

Positioning of the selected object on the same level below this object.

Positioning of the selected object as a child object below this object.

Disabling positioning mode

Click on "X" to disable positioning mode.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 75
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5.3 Dashboards

5.3.1 Overview
To visualize various measurement and plant data in a clear manner in Energy Manager Web,
you can create Widget Dashboards with the help of the shortcut menu. The data is visualized
in the dashboards via widgets. Widget Dashboards are designed for display in Energy
Manager Web or on mobile devices. For this reason, only configure Widget Dashboards in
Energy Manager Web.

5.3.2 Setting up dashboards

Requirements
• The folder has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To create a new Widget Dashboard, follow these steps:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the folder in the navigation area in which you would like to set
up the Widget Dashboard.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right of the menu item.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3. Click on the menu command "Add dashboard".

Result
The new Widget Dashboard is set up in the selected folder of the navigation area.

See also
Editing dashboards (Page 77)
Deleting dashboards (Page 79)
Creating Widgets (Page 80)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

76 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5.3.3 Editing dashboards

Requirements
• The Widget Dashboard has been set up.
• The user has the functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - create, remove, configure" or the
functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - configure".

Procedure
To edit Widget Dashboards, follow these steps:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the Widget Dashboard in the navigation area that you would
like to edit.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right of the menu item.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3. Click on the menu command "Edit".
The configuration dialog for editing the dashboard opens.

4. Enter the name of the Widget Dashboard in the "Name" entry field.
5. If required, enter an additional title of the Widget Dashboard in the "Description" entry field.
6. In order to use a custom background image, if required, click on the "Select file" button and
select the corresponding image.
The background image is positioned centrally and displayed unscaled. The maximum size
of the image is 2 MB.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 77
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

7. To display the current date of the widgets in the dashboard, turn on the "Current Date"
toggle switch.

8. If you want to display a specific time range of the widgets in the dashboard, turn off the
"Current Date" toggle switch. Select the required date and time from the selection boxes.
9. Select the observation period of the data in the Widget Dashboard from the drop-down list
"Query type".
10.To save the configuration, click on the "Save" button.

Result
The configured settings generally apply for the entire dashboard. You can subsequently add
different widgets to the dashboard. More information on adding widgets to a dashboard can
be found in the section "Creating widgets". Settings which you configure in the configuration
dialog of the individual widgets are only valid for the widget in question.

See also
Setting up dashboards (Page 76)
Creating Widgets (Page 80)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

78 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5.3.4 Deleting dashboards

Requirements
• The Widget Dashboard has been set up.
• The user has the functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To delete Widget Dashboards, follow these steps:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the Widget Dashboard in the navigation area that you would
like to delete.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3. Click the "Delete object" button.

Result
The Widget Dashboard is deleted from the system.

See also
Editing dashboards (Page 77)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 79
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5.3.5 Widgets

5.3.5.1 Creating Widgets

Overview
With the help of widgets you display your plant and measurement data in a different way
depending on the widget. You can freely position the widgets within the Widget Dashboard
and adjust their size. The displayed values are updated in accordance with their cycle time
and the query type of the Widget Dashboard.

Requirement
• The user has the functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - configure" or
"Widgets/Dashboards - create, remove, configure".

Basic procedure
To create a widget in the Widget Dashboard, follow these steps:
1. Click in the navigation area on the Widget Dashboard in which you want to add a new
widget.
The Widget Dashboard is displayed in the detail area.
2. Click in the detail area of the Widget Dashboard on the shortcut menu icon to the right of
the observation period.
The shortcut menu opens.
3. Click on the menu command "Add widget".

The "Available Widgets" dialog window opens.

4. Click on the widget you wish to create.
The widget is added on a free area on the Widget Dashboard.

Result
The corresponding widget is created in the selected Dashboard.

See also
Setting up dashboards (Page 76)
Editing widgets (Page 81)
Configuring the General section (Page 95)
Configuring the Parameter section (Page 99)
Available widgets (Page 82)
Widget configuration (Page 95)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

80 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5.3.5.2 Editing widgets

Requirements
• The Widget Dashboard including widget has been set up.
• The user has the functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - create, remove, configure" or the
functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - configure".

Procedure
To edit widgets in a Widget Dashboard, follow these steps:
1. Click in the navigation area on the Widget Dashboard which contains the widget to be
edited.
2. Then click on the shortcut menu icon in the upper right corner of the widget to be edited.
The shortcut menu of the widget opens.
3. Click on the menu command "Edit".

The configuration dialog for editing the widget opens in the detail area.
4. Configure the widget using the individual listed sections.
You can find out how to configure the individual sections in section "Widget configuration
(Page 95)".
5. Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The widget is saved after the corresponding configurations.

See also
Creating Widgets (Page 80)
Widget configuration (Page 95)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 81
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5.3.5.3 Available widgets

Overview
In the dialog window "Available widgets" you can create 15 different widgets. You can find
out how to open the dialog window "Available widgets" and add individual widgets to a
Widget Dashboard in the section "Creating Widgets".
The following image shows you the available widgets:

Depending on the widget, you can use one or more data points. The following table provides
an overview of the available widgets and the number of data points that you can use in the
respective widget.

Widget Individual data point Multiple data points

Gauge x -
Chart - x
Traffic Light x -
Value - x
Pie - x
Matrix - x
Image - -
Report x -
Text - -
Heat Map x -
Map - x
Sankey - x
MultiRegression - x
Duration curve x -

The "Image" and "Text" widgets are special cases and do not require any data points.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

82 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Gauge
The "Gauge" widget shows the value of the data point in a speedometer and displays the
configured warning limits and upper and lower limits in color.

Chart
The "Chart" widget displays the data points in different graphs during the observation period.
If you are in the configuration mode of the dashboard, you can change the display (bar, line,
etc.) by clicking on a data point in the legend. You can change the color of the graph to be
displayed if a second X-axis exists. When you have configured the y-axes, you can adapt the
axis assignment of the y-axes.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 83
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

The second field shows different performance indicators and a histogram with the
distribution of values.

If you are not in configuration mode, you can highlight the data point by clicking on a data
point in the legend. If you have configured plausibility limits in the widget, these limits are
displayed in the graph. Warning levels are displayed as yellow lines, high and low limits are
displayed as red lines. Plausibility limits are not displayed in the histogram.

Traffic Light
The "Traffic Light" widget shows the values of the data points in one of the three traffic light
colors, depending on the defined limits. If you do not define any limits in the widget, the
traffic light always displays green or red.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

84 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Value
The "Value" widget shows the name of the data points, their total value and the associated
unit over the selected observation period.

Pie
The "Pie" widget shows the total value of all data points in the observation period inside the
semicircle. The individual sections of the pie chart show the percentage of the respective data
points. Clicking an individual section of the pie chart shows the value of the individual data
point within the semicircle. When you click on a data point in the legend, you can change the
display color of the corresponding data point.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 85
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Matrix
The "Matrix" widget shows the values of the data points as a matrix with the corresponding
cycle time or timestamp. If you configure plausibility limits in the data point, violations of
warning levels are displayed in yellow, while violations of high and low limits are displayed in
red.

Image
Depending on the configuration, the "Image" widget shows the selected image either
centered in the original size or stretched across the entire length of the widget.

Report
The "Report" widget shows the selected report. You can scroll forwards or backwards in
defined intervals in order to also have past periods or future periods displayed.
If there is no report available for the displayed period, the displayed image is grayed out. Click
on the image to create the report.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

86 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Two icons are available for downloading the report as an EXEL or PDF file.

Text
The "Text" widget shows the entered text in the widget. When you click on a link in the
widget, either the URL opens in the Internet browser or the e-mail program opens depending
on the link.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 87
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Heat Map
The "Heat Map" widget shows a graphical overview of the acquired measured values at
specific times of the day. You can individually configure the lower and upper limits. In this
way, you can track the time at which your defined limits were exceeded or undershot. When
displaying data, you can choose between display over 24 hours or over a week.
The figure below shows an example of a "Heat Map" widget. The measurement data between
noon and 6 p.m. lie for the most part in the lower value range.

Sankey
The Sankey diagram can be used to show an energy flow diagram for a quick overview of the
overall energy situation. You define nodes in the Sankey diagram. You connect these nodes
with links (data points). You configure the color of the nodes in the settings. When you click
on a link, a tooltip shows you the consumption value of the corresponding link. If you display
different types of energy (media) in an energy flow diagram, you have to recalculate the
energy consumption of the medium to the primary energy which is needed for generation of
the medium. If a plant consumes, for example, electrical energy and compressed air, you
have to calculate the consumption of compressed air to the electrical energy required for
generating consumption. This correlation is defined via the scaling factor.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

88 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

The figure below shows a Sankey diagram in which the total consumption of an example hall
is shown:

In addition to the graphical overall display, you see an overview of all the links in the 2nd tab
(Links). The values and the primary energy and the interconnection of the links are shown in
this view.

You see an overview of all the nodes in the 3rd tab (Nodes). The corresponding balance sums
of input, output, difference and the relative deviation are displayed in this view.

When you click on the Info icon next to the numerical value, details of the scaling factor, for
example, are displayed. If several links go into or out of a node, the calculation of the value is
displayed.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 89
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

MultiRegression

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
The "MultiRegression" widget is not available in Energy Manager Basic.

With the "MultiRegression" widget, you determine the Baseline (theoretically calculated
value) of a specific value, for example, the theoretical energy consumption of a plant. If the
energy consumption is dependent on known variables, you can determine the theoretical
energy consumption. The correlation is determined via a linear regression analysis . In
addition to the pure calculation of the theoretical energy consumption, you can also display
the deviation of the actual energy consumption from the theoretical energy consumption.
This means you can evaluate the current energy situation taking into account the ambient
conditions and take appropriate measures in case of deviations. You can also forecast future
energy consumption with the model by integrating the influencing factors into the system in
the future. If the energy consumption strongly depends on the outdoor temperature, for
example, you have to integrate the outdoor temperature into the system in the future.
The "MultiRegression" widget is basically an extension of the Chart widget. The first three
tabs correspond to the Chart widget. The actual and theoretical consumption is shown in the
4th tab (Baseline vs. Actual). When you enable the Forecast function, the Forecast is also
displayed based on the forecasted data of the influencing factors.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

90 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

The deviation between the theoretical and the actual energy consumption is shown in the
5th tab (Deviation). When you enable the Forecast function, the deviation of the Forecast
from the actual consumption is displayed.

In the 6th tab (Cumulative deviation), the deviation of the Baseline and the Forecast is shown
cumulatively.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 91
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

If the Forecast function is enabled and the data points are assigned, the calculated model is
saved twice. Once for the Baseline Management and again for the Forecast. When the first
model is saved, data points derived in the Energy Manager PRO Client are created with a
measuring variable below the dashboard. The derived data points contain the following data:
• Measurement data for the Baseline
• Deviation from actual consumption
• Forecast and deviation of the Forecast from the actual consumption
In the following example, the Y data point is called "e_MVRA_y". The MEVAs used and derived
data points are automatically derived from the name.

For Baseline and Forecast, a separate derived data point is created with the ending
"baseline_deviation" and "forecast_deviation". This data point represents the deviation of the
actual values from the Baseline or the Forecast. When you subsequently change the name of
the Y data point, the names of the derived data points or measuring variables do not change.
You can also use the derived data points in other widgets, for example, in the "Traffic Light"
widget. If the deviation from the Baseline exceeds a particular value, the traffic light changes
to red.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

92 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Duration curve
The "Duration Curve" widget shows measurements for a particular time period in a duration
curve. The widget shows three types:
• Value-sorted duration curve
• Value-sorted duration curve of the n-highest values
• Hour-based representation of the n-highest values
The 1st tab (Widget) displays the duration curve from the highest to the lowest values in the
observation period. The values are shown via the Usage hours. The statistics are displayed at
the top of the tab. In addition to the standardized statistics, Consumption and Usage hours
are also calculated. The Consumption includes the entire consumption in the observation
period. The Usage hours describe the relationship of the total consumption to the maximum
measured value.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 93
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

The 2nd tab (Section) displays the duration curve of the n highest values in the observation
period. The number of measured values which you set in the "Display options" tab determines
the number n. The measured values are displayed via the number of measured values n.

The 3rd tab (Scatter Plot) displays the n highest values based on hours on a day cycle. The
time stamp of the measured values correlates with the hour-based x-axis. The measured
values are shown over 24 hours. The number of measured values which you set in the
"Display options" tab determines the number n.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

94 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5.3.5.4 Widget configuration

Available sections
You configure your created widgets using the available sections.

Note
To configure the sections, you need either the functional right "Widgets/Dashboards -
Configure" or the functional right "Widgets/Dashboards - Create, remove, configure".

Overview
The following table provides an overview of the configurable sections for each widget:

Widget Gen- Data Lim- Y- I Te Heat Loca- San- Alar Model Model Display
eral source its Axis m xt map tions key ms Definition Overview options
a
g
e
Gauge x x x - - - - - - - - - -
Chart x x x x - - - - - - - - -
Traffic x x x - - - - - - - - - -
Light
Value x x - - - - - - - - - - -
Pie x x - - - - - - - - - - -
Matrix x x x - - - - - - - - - -
Image x - - - x - - - - - - - -
Report x x - - - - - - - - - - -
Text x - - - - x - - - - - - -
Heat Map x x - - - - x - - - - - -
Map x x - - - - - x - - - - -
Sankey x x - - - - - - x - - - -
MultiRe- x x x x - - - - - - x x -
gression
Duration x x - - - - - - - - - - x

Configuring the General section

The "General" section is available to a similar extent for all widgets. In this section you
configure the basic information of the widget as well as the date and query type of the
display range. The "Date & Query type" area is not needed for the "Text", "Image" and "Report"
widgets. Instead, these widgets have corresponding sections for entering a text or for
selecting an image or a report.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 95
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Procedure
To configure the "General" section, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the name of the widget in the "Title" entry field.
The input of a name is required.
2. If you have created several Widget Dashboards, you can select a dashboard from the drop-
down list "Dashboard Link".
3. When you close the configuration mode of the dashboard, the following icon is displayed in
the top right-hand corner:

When you click on the icon, you change to the selected Widget Dashboard.
4. Enter the number of decimal places for the display of data point values in the "Decimal
places" entry field.
Entry of the number of decimal places is required.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

96 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5. To apply the date and the query type of the configured Widget Dashboard, turn on the "Use
dashboard settings" toggle switch.
The selection of a particular timespan and the selection of a query type are deactivated.
6. To use a specific date and a specific query type, turn off the "Use dashboard settings" toggle
switch.
7. If you want to use the current date, turn on the "Current Date" toggle switch.
8. If you want to display a specific time, select the desired start date with the associated time.
9. Select the required observation period linked to the date from the drop-down list "Query
type".
10.If required, shift the start time of the measured value series, e.g. from 00:00 to 08:00, using
the "Offset" entry field.

11.Select the compression level of the measured values from the drop-down list "Compression".
By selecting the compression level you can compress, for example, the cyclically recorded
15-minute values to hourly values.
12.If you enter a numerical value in the "Offset [s]" entry field, the measured values are only
updated after the duration entered has expired.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 97
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

13.If you turn on the "Timestamps left aligned" toggle switch, the start time (timestamp) of the
measured values is displayed.

14.The "Comparison" area is only available for the "Chart" widget; you use it to display a time
comparison of the selected data point graphically. If you select the "Static" option, you set a
fixed time range using the entry field. If you select the "Dynamic" option, you enter the time
offset relative to the query type that is used for the comparison in the "Offset" entry field. A
negative value jumps back to the past by one time offset, a positive value jumps to the
future.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

98 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Parameter section

You configure the "Parameter" section for almost all the available widgets. In this section, you
select the data sources you want to visualize in the corresponding widget.

Requirement
• The data sources have been created.

Procedure
To configure the "Parameter" section, proceed as follows:
1. Select the data sources that you want to use in the widget in the "Parameter" section. You
can enter the data sources in the entry field. The drop-down list to the left of the search field
allows the search to be limited to the object types "All","Data point","Measuring
variable","Parameter".

Selected data sources are displayed below the search field in numerical order.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 99
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

2. To configure further information of the selected data source, click on the "Edit" button of the
corresponding data source.
This opens the additional setting options of the data source.

3. To use the name of the data point in the display, select the "Name" option.
A change to the name in the entry field underneath is not possible.
4. To use an alternative name of the data point in the display, select the "Custom" option. Enter
the name in the "Custom" entry field underneath.
5. Select the "Description" check box if you want to use the description of a data point in the
display.
It is not possible to enter a description. You enter the description text when creating the
data source.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

100 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

6. Select the display type of the values in the widget from the drop-down list "Category". The
drop-down list is only available for data point types of the category "Energy", "Power" or
"Count value".
You can choose between the following display types:
– Energy / consumption
– Power / Flow
– Counter (only available for acquisition category "Count value")
If you use a data point of the acquisition category "Energy / Consumption", for example,
and set the display type in the widget to "Power / Flow" the original energy values change
to the corresponding power values. The unit in the display of the widget also changes
accordingly, for example, from kWh to kW.

Note
If you change the display type, the unit of the y-axis does not change. The unit of the y-
axis is initialized with the first data point added. You set the unit of the y-axis under "Y-
Axis" in the "Axes" section.

The conversion of the unit is always hour-related, for example, from J to J/h or from W to
Wh.
7. Select the information type which you would like to display from the drop-down list
"Function". You can choose from the following information types:
– sum: Shows the values from the "Sum" column of the measured value editor in the
defined observation period.
– min: Shows the values from the "Minimum" column of the measured value editor in
the defined observation period.
– max: Shows the values from the "Maximum" column of the measured value editor in
the defined observation period.
– avg: Shows the values from the "Average" column of the measured value editor in the
defined observation period.
– last value: Shows the values from the "Last value" column of the measured value editor
in the defined observation period.
The information type "avg" is automatically and unalterably enabled for the category
"Power / Flow" selected in step 6. The default setting for the "Energy/Consumption"
category is the information type "sum"; the default setting for the "Counter" category is
the information type "last value". You can change both information types later.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 101
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Limits section

The "Limits" section is available for the following widgets:
• Gauge
• Chart
• Traffic Light
• Matrix
• MultiRegression
In this section, you define a validity range for the measured data by setting limits.

Procedure
To configure the "Limits" section, proceed as follows:
1. Click on the data source that you want to configure.
The possible limit settings are opened.
2. Enter the lower and upper limits for the alarm range in the left and right entry fields below
"Alarm".
3. Enter the lower and upper limits for the warning range in the left and right entry fields
below "Warning".

Note
If you have already configured a plausibility for a data point and have defined the limits
for the alarm and warning range, these entries are automatically applied in the section.

Note
For a Gauge or Traffic Light widget, you can also define the color display of the ranges.

4. In the case of a Gauge widget, enter the start of display or end of display in the "Min-Range"
and "Max-Range" entry field, respectively.

Note
The entries configured in the widget only apply to this widget and are not updated in the
data source. A change to the limits in the widget does not change the plausibility settings in
the data source.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

102 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Axes section

The "Axes" section is available for the "Chart" and "MultiRegression" widgets. In this section,
you configure the graphs and Y-axes of the chart. You can add up to five additional Y-axes. If
you have added more than one y-axis, you can delete y-axes that are no longer required by
clicking on the "Delete" button.

Procedure for configuring graphs

To configure the graphs, proceed as follows:
1. To configure the curve display of the desired graph, click on the "Edit" button of the
respective data point.
The possible settings for the graph are opened.

2. Select the desired display options of the graph using the check boxes.
You can choose from the following display options:
– Visible: The curve is display visibly.
– Step: The curve is displayed in the shape of steps.
– Stacked: The curve is displayed in stacked bars.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 103
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

3. Select the display type of the curve from the "Type" drop-down list.
You can choose between the following types:
– Area
– Bar
– Line
– Points
– Spline
4. Select the y-axis to be displayed for the graph in the "Y-Axis" drop-down list.
5. Enter the label of the graph in "Label" entry field.
6. Under "Color", select the display color of the graph.
7. Under "Comparison Period Color", select the color of the comparison graph.
The option of the displayed comparison graph is enabled in the "General" section.
8. Click the "OK" button to confirm the configuration.

Procedure for configuring the y-axis

To configure the y-axis, follow these steps:
1. To configure the desired y-axis, click on the "Edit" button.
The possible settings for the y-axis are opened.

2. Enter the name for the y-axis in the "Title" entry field. The unit of the data point measured
values is usually entered.
3. Under "Color", select the display color of the y-axis.
4. If you want to display the y-axis on the right side of the graph, select the "Axis on right side"
check box.
The y-axis is displayed on the left by default.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

104 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5. Enter the limits of the y-axis in the "Lower Limit" and "Upper Limit" entry fields.
6. Click the "OK" button to confirm the configuration.
7. If you want to add another y-axis, click on the "Add new Y-Axis" button.
A new Y-axis is created in the list.
8. Repeat steps 1-6 for the new y-axis.

Note
In the widget, the title or the unit of the y-axis is initialized with the first added data point.

Note
When you do not enter any limits in the "Lower Limit" and "Upper Limit" entry fields, the y
axis is automatically adapted.

Configuring the Image section

The "Image" section is available for the "Image" widget. With this section, you display a
custom image in the Widget Dashboard.

Procedure
To configure the "Image" section, proceed as follows:
1. Under "Dashboard Link", select the Dashboard in the drop-drop list to which the image is to
be added.
2. Under "Display mode", select whether you want to display the image "Top left" in the same
size, "Centered" in the same size or "Stretched".
3. If you want to add an image from the Internet, insert the link of the image under "Image
URL".
4. If you want to add a locally saved image, click on the "Select file" button to upload your
desired image.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 105
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Text section

The "Text" section is available for the "Text" widget. With this section, you compose a custom
text that is displayed in the widget. You can also insert a URL link or an e-mail address with a
particular message text as text. When you click on the URL link after configuration, the page
is opened in your Internet browser. When you click on the e-mail link, your default e-mail
program opens to which the entered texts are copied.

Procedure
To configure the "Text" section, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the required text in the text field. When entering the text you can choose from the
following functions for editing the text:
– Bold
– Italic
– Underline
– Strikethrough
– Numbered list
– List
– Subscript
– Superscript
– Decrease indent
– Increase indent
– Show formatting symbols
– Font size
– Text color
– Background color
– Font type
– Text alignment
– Insert/edit link
– Insert image

2. When you click on the "Insert link" icon, the dialog window "Link" opens.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

106 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

3. Select the type of link from the "Link type" drop-down list.
You can choose between the following types:
– Open in new tab
– E-mail
4. Select one of the available transfer protocols from the drop-down list "Protocol".
5. Enter a valid URL in the "URL" entry field.

6. To send a text via e-mail, select the menu command "E-mail" from the drop-down list "Link
type".
7. Enter the recipient's-mail address in the "E-mail address" entry field.
8. Enter the subject in the "Subject line" entry field.
9. Enter the text message in the "Message text" entry field.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 107
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Data source report section

A special view of the "Data source" section with the "Reports" area is available for the "Report"
widget. In this section, you select the report that is generated in the widget.

Requirement
• The report has been created.

Procedure
To configure the "Data source" section of the "Report" widget, proceed as follows:
1. Select the desired report you want to use in the widget.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

108 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Heatmap section

The "Heatmap" section is available for the "Heat Map" widget. With this section, you set the
limits and the display of the measured values.

Procedure
To configure the "Heatmap" section, proceed as follows:
1. Enter your individual limits for the measurement data in the "Lower limit" and "Upper limit"
entry fields. In this way you define a valid range for your measurement data. If you do not
enter any values in the entry fields, the maximum and minimum measured value is used as
the limit.
2. Select the display color of the measured values for the settings "Normal", "Warning" and
"Violation".
3. If you want to display the measurement data for a day, select the "Day view" option. If you
want to display the measured data for a week, select the "Week view" option.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 109
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Locations section

The "Locations" section is available for the "Map" widget. With this section, you configure the
location-specific KPIs and dashboards that you view from your system.

Requirements
• The location object with valid GPS coordinates has been created.
• The location object is assigned to the corresponding user group.
• The dashboards have been created.
• The KPIs have been created.

Procedure
To configure the "Locations" section, proceed as follows:
1. Select the locations for which you want to display the location-specific dashboards and KPIs
from the drop-down list "Select location".

Note
To display your created locations in the widget, you have to enter the geographical
coordinates of the location in the location object in the Energy Manager PRO Client. Only
locations with valid coordinates are available for selection in the widget. You can
determine the coordinates using Google Maps, for example, and copy them to the
location object. You must separate the two coordinates with a blank space.
In addition, you have to assign the location object to the corresponding user group.
You can find more detailed information on location selection in the "Map" paragraph of
the "Extended widgets" section.

The selected locations are displayed in the "Currently selected" list.

2. To select the location-specific dashboards and KPIs, click the corresponding location.
3. Select up to two dashboards to which you want to jump directly from the location tooltip for
each location in the drop-down list "Add dashboard".
4. Enter the name of the dashboard in the adjacent entry field.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

110 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

5. Select up to five KPIs you want to display for each location from the "Add a parameter" drop-
down list.

Note
You can configure up to 50 data points or KPIs in the "Map" widget.

6. When you click on the Delete icon, you remove KPIs which are no longer required.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 111
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Sankey section

The "Sankey" section is available for the "Sankey" widget. With this section, you configure the
nodes and data points that you use in the Sankey diagram.

Requirement
• The data points have been created.

Procedure
To configure the "Sankey" section, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the name of the node (media) you want to show in the Sankey diagram in the "Add a
node" entry field.
Use meaningful names for the corresponding nodes.
2. Click on the "Add node" button.

The node is added to the list "Current nodes".

3. Click on the name of a node and select a color.
4. From the drop-down list "Add a link" select the data points that you want to use in the
Sankey diagram.
5. To incorporate the data points in the Sankey diagram, click on the "Add link" button.

Note
You can configure up to 50 nodes and data points in the Sankey diagram.

The data points are displayed in the list "Current links".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

112 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

6. To link the data points with the corresponding nodes, click on the data points.

7. Select the incoming quantity flow of the respective data points from the drop-down list
"Source", and the outgoing quantity flow of the respective data points from the drop-down
list "Target".

Note
When linking the data points with the nodes you have to assign the "source" and "target"
of a data point to different nodes.

8. Enter a scaling factor in the "Scaling" entry field. The scaling factor is required for
recalculation to the primary energy in an energy flow diagram with different media.
9. You can remove nodes or data points which are no longer required from the Sankey
diagram with the help of the delete icon.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 113
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Configuring the Model parameters section

The "Model parameters" section is available for the "MultiRegression" widget. With the "Model
parameters" section, you configure the data points for determining the Baseline and Forecast.

Requirement
• The data points have been created.

Procedure
To configure the "Model parameters" section, proceed as follows:
1. Select the data point whose Baseline you want to determine, for example, energy
consumption of a plant, from the drop-down list "Output parameter/Y-values".
2. Select the data points that influence the Y-data point from the drop-down lists "Baseline
input parameters". You can select up to five data points.
3. If you want to use the Forecast function, enable the "Use forecast" option.
4. Then select the corresponding x-values from the drop-down lists under "Forecast input
parameters".
The same number of parameters is required for the Baseline and the Forecast.
5. With the help of the corresponding selection boxes, select the analysis time window in
which you want to analyze the selected data.

Note
No one-time special effects should exist in this time window, because they would
influence the result.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

114 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

6. To exclude spikes in the values from the calculation, enter a spike correction value greater
than 0%.
A value of 100% means that a deviation greater than 100% between the calculated and
actual y value is not included in the calculation.
7. Click on the "Calculate formula" to start the analysis.
The result is output with the "coefficient of determination" and the "F-Ratio". The
coefficient of determination specifies the correlation between the values. The coefficient
of determination lies between the value 0 and the value 1. In addition, the color adjusts to
the coefficient of determination:
– 0 - 0.3 No or little correlation (red)
– 0.3 - 0.6 Medium correlation (yellow)
– 0.6 - 1: Good or full correlation (green)
8. If the result shows a corresponding correlation, you can set the validity time of this model.
9. Click on the "Save event" button.
10.If the result shows a corresponding correlation, you can load a previously calculated analysis
by clicking on the "Load result" button.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 115
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.3 Dashboards

Model overview section

The "Model Overview" section is available for the "MultiRegression" widget. With this section,
you see an overview of the models defined in the "Model parameters" section.

Procedure
In the "Model Overview" section, you cannot configure any parameters, but only delete
models. You delete models by clicking on the delete icon. Only the defined models are
displayed in the model overview. The date specifies the validity time of the model.

Configuring the Display options section

The "Display options" section is available for the "Duration Curve" widget. With this section,
you enter the number of measured values that you use for display of the duration curves.

Procedure
To configure the "Display options" section, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the number of measured values you want to use for displaying the duration curves in
the "Amount of data for detail view" entry field.
The number of measured values is used for the display of the 2nd and 3rd tab in the
"Duration Curve" widget.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

116 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

5.4 Reports

5.4.1 Overview
To evaluate measurement data in Energy Manager Web, you can create and configure reports
with the help of the shortcut menu. The creation of reports in Energy Manager Web is based
on report templates. You cannot configure these report templates in Energy Manager Web,
but only in the Energy Manager PRO Client. Newly created reports and configurations on
already existing reports in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the
Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

5.4.2 Creating reports

Requirements
• The folder has been created.
• The data points, measuring variables and parameters have been created.
• Users have been created.
• The user has the functional right "Report - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To create reports, follow these steps:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the folder in the navigation area in which you would like to
create the report.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right of the menu item.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3. Click on the "Add report" menu command.
The configuration dialog "New - Report" is opened.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 117
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

Configuring the "General" section

1. Enter a meaningful name for the report in the "Name" text box.
The input of a name is required.

Note
Do not use Excel-specific expressions such as A1 or =FG14 during the report creation.
The report name cannot contain any special characters. The following characters are
permitted:
• A to Z
• a to z
• 0 to 9
• _
• Space

2. If required, enter a description of the report in the "Description" text box.

3. Select the display type of the name in the report from the drop-down list "Text type".
4. Select the appropriate country from the drop-down list "Country".
5. To use a desired report template, enable the "Use template" option. The following report
templates are available:
– Balance Calculates the total value of the selected data points, measuring variables and
parameters over the entire observation period of the report.
– Balance comparing In addition to the "Balance" template, it calculates the total value of
the previous observation period and that of the previous year.
– Protocol Returns the values of the selected objects in the selected interval within the
observation period.
– Protocol with from/to In addition to the "Protocol" template, it specifies the timestamp
with the start and end of the interval.
– Duration curve Sorts the values (from the largest to the smallest) of the selected
objects in the selected interval within the observation period.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

118 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

The query types which you configured in the report template are automatically adopted as
query types.

Configuring the "Periods (Query types)" section

1. You have the option of selecting further query types from the drop-down list "Select query
type". The selected query types are displayed in the overview list.
2. You can select a compression level for each query type.

Note
If you set the compression level "Dynamic values" in this area, the calculation logic uses
the best possible compression level for the calculation automatically.

3. To delete existing report results, enter an interval in the "Report delete after" entry field
Select the associated unit from the drop-down list.
4. To enable automatic report creation, enable the "Start" option.
5. To delay the report creation, enter the desired delay in the "Start report after" entry field.
Select the associated unit from the drop-down list.
6. To calculate existing report results again, enter an interval in the "Repeat calculation every"
entry field. Select the associated unit from the drop-down list.
You can use this option, for example, to update a created report result daily and overwrite
the existing report result.
To create a new report result with the current values each time, select the "Create each
with a new result" check box.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 119
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

7. To send the generated report to selected users via e-mail automatically, enable the "Send
per mail" option.
8. Select the format of the report. You can choose between PDF and Excel format.
9. To additionally receive a link to the report, select the "Mail link to recipient in addition to the
file" check box.
10.Select the users who will receive the report under "Select users". Only users with assigned e-
mail address are displayed. The recipients of the report are displayed in an overview list.
11.Click on the "OK" button.
12.Repeat steps 1 to 11 for each selected query type.
13.To remove query types that are no longer required, click on the Delete icon.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

120 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

Configuring the "Sections (Modules)" section

1. To add a module, click on "Add new module".
2. You can change the order of the modules via Drag and Drop.
3. To remove modules that are no longer required, click on the Remove icon to the right of the
module name.
4. To edit a module, press the Edit button.
5. Enter a name for the module in the "Module name" text box.

Note
The report module names are used as Excel "cell names".
To ensure conformant module configuration, observe the standard designations for the
country-specific Microsoft EXCEL documentation.
Do not use Excel-specific expressions, e.g. C1 or R1, or Z1 or S1 in German systems, at the
beginning of the report module name.

6. Under "Type", select the module type.

– You need a data point to configure a query module.
– You need a data point, a parameter or a measuring variable to configure a balancing
module or a protocol module.
More information on the module types is available in the section "Module overview".
7. Select the "Insert rows before inserting values" check box if required.
8. In the event of an interval configuration, select the corresponding time interval for each
existing query type. Using the time interval you divide the observation period into equally
sized intervals.
9. Select the data points, parameters and MEVAs that you want to use in the module. You can
enter the data points in the text box. You can use the drop-down list to limit the search to
the object types "All", "Data point", "Measuring variable" and "Parameter".
Selected data points are displayed below the search bar.

Note
Object descriptions of Data points, Measuring variables and Parameters must not contain
Excel-specific expressions such as A1 or =FG14.
If you output the properties of objects in reports, do not use Excel-specific expressions in
the output properties.

Note
Pay attention to the order of the data points in the module types.

10.Click on "OK".
11.Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each module.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 121
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

12.You can change the order of the data points via Drag and Drop.
13.To remove data points that are no longer required, click on the Remove icon to the right of
the desired data point name.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

122 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

Configuring the "Template" section

1. To apply newly created modules to the report template, click on "Generate names". A new
report template is created, or an existing report template is updated.
2. To edit report templates, click on the "Export existing template" button.
The report templates are exported to the default download directory of your browser as
an .xlsm file.
3. To import edited report templates, click the "Import new template file" button. Select the
edited report template.

Result
The report has been created.

See also
Editing reports (Page 124)
Deleting reports (Page 125)
Creating users (Page 228)
Creating MEVAs / KPIs (Page 207)
Creating parameters (Page 201)
Creating data points (Page 181)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 123
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

5.4.3 Editing reports

Instead of selecting a report template when editing a report, you can export and import
report templates. You can edit and then reimport report templates which you export. You can
also import other saved report templates. The imported report template is used for the next
report generation.

Requirements
• The report has been created.
• The data points, measuring variables and parameters have been created.
• The report templates have been configured.
• Users have been created.
• The user has the functional right "Report - configure" or the functional right "Report -
create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To edit reports, follow these steps:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the report in the navigation area which you want to edit.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right of the menu item.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
3. Click on the menu command "Edit".
The configuration dialog for editing the settings of the report opens.
4. You can configure all the settings again which you defined on creation of a report.
The input of a name is required.
5. To export report templates, click the "Export" button. You can open the report templates
directly or save the report templates. Saved report templates are exported to the standard
download directory of your browser as an .xlsm file.
6. To import report templates, click the "Import" button.
7. Select the report template you want to import.
The settings in the report template are adopted for the selected report.

Note
When you import a new report template for an existing report, you must enable the
current report configurations in the report template again with "Generate names" under
"Template".

8. Click on the "Save" button.

See also
Creating reports (Page 117)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

124 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.4 Reports

5.4.4 Deleting reports

Requirements
• The report has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Report - create, remove, configure".

Deleting a report
To delete reports, follow these steps:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the report in the navigation area which you want to delete.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right of the menu item.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
3. Click on the "Delete object" button.
4. Confirm the deletion in the confirmation window to delete the object.
You have the option of canceling the deletion in the confirmation window.

Result
The report is deleted from the system.

See also
Editing reports (Page 124)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 125
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.5 Diagrams

5.5 Diagrams

5.5.1 Overview
To graphically display measurement data in Energy Manager Web, you can create new charts
and configure existing charts with the help of the shortcut menu. Newly created charts and
configurations on already existing charts in EnergyManagerPROWeb are also adopted in the
Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

5.5.2 Creating charts

Requirements
• The folder has been created.
• The data points have been created.
• The user has the functional right "Chart Object - create".

Procedure
To create charts, follow these steps:
1. Enable the editing mode.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the folder in the navigation area in which you want to create
the chart.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed in the right-hand area of the menu item.
3. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
4. Click on the menu command "Add chart".
The configuration dialog "New - Chart" opens.
5. Enter a meaningful name for the chart in the "Name" entry field.
The input of a name is required.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

126 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.5 Diagrams

6. If required, enter a description of the chart in the "Description" entry field.

7. Click the "Save" button.

Result
The chart has been created.

See also
Creating data points (Page 181)
Editing charts (Page 128)
Deleting charts (Page 129)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 127
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.5 Diagrams

5.5.3 Editing charts

Requirements
• The chart has been created.
• The data points have been created.
• The user has the functional right "Chart Object - configure".

Procedure
To edit charts, follow these steps:
1. Enable the editing mode.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the chart in the navigation area which you want to edit.
The Edit icon is displayed in the right-hand area of the menu item.
3. Click on the editing icon.
The configuration dialog "Edit - Chart" opens.
4. As with creating a chart, you can configure the name and description again.
The input of a name is required.
5. Click on the "Save" button.

See also
Creating charts (Page 126)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

128 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.5 Diagrams

5.5.4 Deleting charts

Requirements
• The chart has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Chart Object - delete".

Procedure
To delete charts, follow these steps:
1. In the navigation area, place the mouse pointer over the chart you would like to delete.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right of the menu item.
2. Click the shortcut menu icon.
3. Click the "Delete object" button.
4. Confirm the deletion in the confirmation window to delete the object.
You have the option of canceling the deletion in the confirmation window.

Result
The chart is deleted from the system.

See also
Editing charts (Page 128)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 129
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.6 Matrices

5.6 Matrices

5.6.1 Overview
To manually acquire measurement data in Energy Manager Web or define a reading route for
mobile data acquisition using the Energy Manager App, you need matrices. You create
matrices and configure them in Energy Manager Web. Newly created matrices and
configurations on already existing matrices in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in
the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

5.6.2 Creating matrices

Requirements
• The folder has been created.
• The data points have been created.
• The user has the functional right "Matrix - create, remove, modify".

Procedure
To create matrices, follow these steps:
1. Enable the editing mode.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the folder in the navigation area in which you would like to
create the matrix.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed in the right-hand area of the menu item.
3. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
4. Click on the menu command "Add matrix".
The configuration dialog "New - Matrix" opens.
5. In the "Name" text box, enter the name of the matrix.
6. Enter a description of the matrix in the "Description" text box. This entry is optional.
7. Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The matrix has been created.

See also
Editing matrices (Page 131)
Deleting matrices (Page 132)
Setting up mobile data acquisition with the SIMATIC Energy Manager app for iOS and Android
(Page 66)
Creating data points (Page 181)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

130 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.6 Matrices

5.6.3 Editing matrices

Requirements
• The matrix has been created.
• The data points have been created.
• The user has either the functional right "Matrix - create, remove, modify" or the functional
right "Matrix - modify".

Procedure
To edit matrices, follow these steps:
1. Enable the editing mode.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the matrix in the navigation area which you want to edit.
The Edit icon is displayed in the right-hand area of the menu item.
3. Click on the editing icon.
The configuration dialog "Edit - Matrix" opens.
4. You can configure all the settings again which you defined on creation of a matrix.
The input of a name is required.
5. Click on the "Save" button.

See also
Creating matrices (Page 130)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 131
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.6 Matrices

5.6.4 Deleting matrices

Requirements
• The matrix has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Matrix - create, remove, modify".

Procedure
To delete matrices, follow these steps:
1. In the navigation area, place the mouse pointer over the matrix which you want to delete.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right of the menu item.
2. Click the shortcut menu icon.
3. Click the "Delete object" button.
4. Confirm the deletion in the confirmation window to delete the object.
You have the option of canceling the deletion in the confirmation window.

Result
The matrix is deleted from the system.

See also
Editing matrices (Page 131)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

132 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.7 Folders

5.7 Folders

5.7.1 Overview
To create a custom navigation structure in Energy Manager Web, create new folders and
configure existing folders with the help of the shortcut menu. Newly created folders and
configurations on already existing folders in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in
the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

5.7.2 Creating folders

Requirement
• The user has the functional right "Folder - create, delete"

Procedure
To create folders, follow these steps:
1. Enable the editing mode.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the folder in the navigation area in which you want to create a
new folder.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed in the right-hand area of the menu item.
3. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
4. Click on the "Add folder" menu command.
The configuration dialog "New - Folder" opens.
5. Enter a meaningful name for the folder in the "Name" entry field.

The input of a name is required.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 133
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.7 Folders

6. If required, enter a description of the folder in the "Description" entry field.

7. Enter the authority level for the folder in the "Authority level" entry field.
8. Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The folder has been created.

See also
Folder (Page 31)
Editing folders (Page 135)
Deleting folders (Page 136)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

134 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Configuration of the analysis objects
5.7 Folders

5.7.3 Editing folders

Requirements
• The folder has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Folder - configure".

Procedure
To edit folders, follow these steps:
1. Enable the editing mode.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the folder in the navigation area which you want to edit.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed in the right-hand area of the menu item.
3. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu opens.
4. Click on the menu command "Edit".
The configuration dialog "Edit - Folder" opens.
5. Configure the name, the description, if required, and the authorization level of the folder.
The input of a name is required.
6. Click on the "Save" button.

See also
Folder (Page 31)
Creating folders (Page 133)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 135
Configuration of the analysis objects
5.7 Folders

5.7.4 Deleting folders

Requirements
• The folder has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Folder - create, delete".

Procedure
To delete folders, follow these steps:
1. In the navigation area, place the mouse pointer over the folder which you want to delete.
The shortcut menu icon is displayed in the right-hand area of the menu item.
2. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
3. Click the "Delete object" button.
4. Confirm the deletion in the confirmation window to delete the object.
You have the option of canceling the deletion in the confirmation window.

Result
The folder is deleted from the system.

See also
Editing folders (Page 135)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

136 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
Project configuration 6
6.1 Overview
In the "Project configuration" folder you create new data sources and data channels as well as
their processing calculations in Energy Manager Web. You can also configure already existing
objects.
You can configure the following acquisition and processing objects:
• Data sources
• Data points
• Parameter
• MEVAs / KPIs

Opening the project configuration

To open the "Project configuration" folder, follow these steps:
1. Click in the menu bar on "Configuration".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 137
Project configuration
6.1 Overview

2. Click the menu item "Project configuration" in the navigation area.

In the detail area you see an overview of the configurable objects in tile form.

The number of available objects is displayed in the bottom part of the tiles.

Note
Data points, Parameter and MEVAs / KPIs are only available in the configuration area in
Energy Manager Web if the following criteria are met:
• The object is linked at least once in the entry point of the user in the Web.
• The authority level of the object is lower than or the same as the authority level of the
user.
• The object and the user are assigned to the same domain.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

138 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.1 Overview

3. To configure the respective object, click on the corresponding tile in the detail area. As an
alternative, you can click on the corresponding menu item in the navigation area.

Note
The folder structures are automatically created after the installation of Energy Manager and
cannot be deleted by the user. The structure of the configuration area is created in the
Energy Manager PRO Client under the path "System > Configuration > Web Configuration".

See also
Data source (Page 142)
Data point (Page 179)
Parameters (Page 199)
MEVA / KPI (Page 205)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 139
Project configuration
6.2 Creating subfolders

6.2 Creating subfolders

In Energy Manager Web you can create new subfolders in the "Data point", "Parameter" and
"MEVA / KPI" folders. When you create a new data point, parameter or KPI, you can select the
folder in which you want to create the object from the "Structure" drop-down list.

Requirement
• The user has the functional right "Folder - create, delete"

Procedure
To create a new subfolder, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "Configuration" icon in the menu bar.
2. Click the menu item "Project configuration" in the navigation area.
3. Place the mouse pointer in the navigation area either over the menu item "Data point",
"Parameter" or "MEVA / KPI".
The shortcut menu icon is displayed on the right-hand side of the corresponding menu
item.
4. Click on the shortcut menu icon.
The shortcut menu is opened with the menu commands "Edit" and "New".

5. Click on the menu command "New".

The configuration dialog "New - Folder" opens.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

140 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.2 Creating subfolders

6. Enter a meaningful name for the folder in the "Name" entry field.
The input of a name is required.
7. If required, enter a description of the folder in the "Description" entry field.
8. Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The new folder is created under the selected folder. You can create an additional folder in the
new folder using the same procedure. You can therefore create a structure of up to five
levels. Click on the menu command "Edit" in the shortcut menu to edit already created
folders.

Note
You cannot edit the automatically created "Data points", "Parameter" and "MEVAs / KPIs"
folders in this way.

See also
Creating parameters (Page 201)
Creating data points (Page 181)
Creating MEVAs / KPIs (Page 207)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 141
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3 Data source

6.3.1 Overview
When configuring data sources you create new acquisition objects and data channels in
Energy Manager PRO Web. From these data channels you can create new data points per data
channel. Newly created data sources and changes to already existing objects in
Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
The creation of new data sources is not available in Energy Manager Basic. Only the
automatically installed data source is available.

When you click on the menu item "Data source" in the navigation area in the "Project
configuration" folder, the detail area "Acquisition - Administration" opens. The following
figure shows the detail area "Acquisition - Administration":

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new data sources.
② Display table of existing data sources.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are searched and displayed accordingly
in the display table. Delimitation of the data sources is recommended when a large number of data sources exist in
the system.
④ "Delete" button: Deleting created data sources from the system.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

142 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

Newly created data sources and already existing data sources in the system are displayed in
tabular form in Energy Manager Web. The display table consists of the following seven
columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual data sources and any number of data sources with the help of the check boxes.
Clicking on the check box in the column header selects all data sources. Clicking on the check box again in
the column header deselects all data sources again.
Name Shows the name of the data source.
Description Shows the description of the data source.
Status Shows the status of the data source. If the status of the data source shows "Active", data acquisition is ena-
bled. If the status of the data source shows "Inactive", data acquisition is not enabled.
Host name Shows the host name of the data source.
IP address Shows the IP address of the data source. Is assigned by the system itself.
GUID Shows the acquisition ID of the data source. Is assigned by the system itself.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Editing data sources (Page 146)
Deleting data sources (Page 147)
Overview (Page 149)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 143
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.2 Creating data sources

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
The creation of new data sources is not available in Energy Manager Basic.

Procedure
To create a new data source, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "New" button in the detail area "Acquisition - Administration" .
The configuration dialog "New - Acquisition" opens.

2. Enter a meaningful name for the data source in the "Name" entry field.
The input of a name with the prefix "h_" is required.
3. If required, enter a description of the new data source in the "Description" entry field.
4. Enter a meaningful host name in the "Hostname" entry field.
The input of a host name is required.
5. To acquire measurement data from the data source, enable the option "Active". The status of
the data source is therefore set to "Active" in the display table.
6. Click on the "Restart Kernel" button to restart the kernel.
7. Click on the "Save" button.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

144 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

Result
The data source is created under the "Data source" folder in the navigation area. The
corresponding object can be found in the Energy Manager PRO Client under the following
path: "System > Configuration > Web Configuration > Data sources". However, to acquire
measurement data from this data source and create data points, you must create data
channels for every data source afterwards. How to create data channels is described in the
section "Creating data channels".

Note
As soon as you create an additional data source or the data source runs on a different
computer than the Energy Manager Server, you have to connect the data source with the
server. You set up the connection via the 'Acquisition' user interface.

See also
Editing data sources (Page 146)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 145
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.3 Editing data sources

Requirement
• The data source has been created.

Procedure
To edit an already created data source, follow these steps:
1. Click on the data source to be edited in the display table.
2. Click the "Edit" button. As an alternative, place the mouse pointer in the navigation area over
the data source to be edited and click on the Edit icon.
The configuration dialog "Edit - Acquisition" opens.
3. Edit names, description and host names.
The input of a name with the prefix "h_" and the input of a host name is required.
4. Data acquisition is enabled when you enable the option "Active".
5. Click on the "Save" button.

Note
You can only edit single selected data sources.

See also
Overview (Page 142)
Creating data sources (Page 144)
Deleting data sources (Page 147)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

146 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.4 Deleting data sources

Requirement
• The data source has been created.

Procedure
To delete one or more data sources from the system, follow these steps:
1. Click on the data source to be deleted in the display table. You can also select one or more
data sources to be deleted with the help of the check boxes.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
3. Click the "Delete" button again to confirm the deletion process. As an alternative, you can
delete individual data sources from the system in the configuration dialog "Edit - Acquisition"
by clicking the "Delete" button twice.

Result
The data source is deleted from the system.

Note
When you delete a data source, all the lower-level object links are deleted from the system.

See also
Overview (Page 142)
Editing data sources (Page 146)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 147
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.5 Manual acquisition

When installing Energy Manager, the "Manual acquisition" folder is automatically created in
the project folder "Data source", in which you can create, edit and delete manual data points.
The folder is not an acquisition object as such, but rather contains only an overview of all
manual data points. In the Energy Manager PRO Client you can find the folder under the
following path: "System > Configuration > Web Configuration> Data sources".
To open the "Manual acquisition" folder, click on the menu item "Manual acquisition" in the
navigation area under the "Data source" project folder. The following figure shows the detail
area "Data point - Administration" with an overview of all manual data points in the "Manual
acquisition" folder:

The display table with the columns contained there corresponds to the display table of the
other data sources.

6.3.6 Derived data points

When installing Energy Manager, the "Derived data points" folder is automatically created in
the project folder "Data source". You can create, edit and delete derived data points in this
folder. The folder is not an acquisition object as such, but rather contains only an overview of
all derived data points. In the Energy Manager PRO Client you can find the folder under the
following path: "System > Configuration >Web Configuration > Data sources".
To open the "Derived data points" folder, click on the menu item "Derived data points" in the
navigation area under the "Data source" project folder.
The display table with the columns contained there corresponds to the display table of the
other data sources.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

148 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7 Data channels

6.3.7.1 Overview
To create data points in Energy Manager Web, and hence acquire measurement data, you
need data channels. You can create different data channels for each data source created.
Newly created data channels and changes to already existing channels in Energy Manager
PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa. You can only
create the following channel types for data acquisition in Energy Manager PRO Web:
• OPC UA, DA, HDA
• WinCC
• Energy Suite
• Modbus / TCP
• ASCII
• WinCC Unified DP

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
Only the automatically installed data channels are available in Energy Manager Basic.

When you click on a data source in the navigation area, the associated data channels are
displayed in the detail area in tabular form and in the navigation area under the data source.
The following figure shows the detail area "Channel management" with an overview of the
existing data channels of a data source:

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new data channels.
② Display table of existing data channels per data source.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 149
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are searched and
displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation of the data channels is recommended
when a large number of data channels exist per data source.
④ "Delete" button: Deleting created data channels from the system.

Newly created channels and channels available per data source are displayed in tabular form
in Energy Manager Web. The display table consists of the following three columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual data channels and any number of data channels with the
help of the check boxes. By clicking on the check box in the column header you select
all data channels. Clicking on the check box again in the column header deselects all
data channels again.
Name Shows the name of the data channel
Type Shows the channel type.
Status Shows the status of the data acquisition.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Overview (Page 142)
Creating data channels (Page 151)
Editing data channels (Page 174)
Deleting data channels (Page 175)
Data point - Administration (Page 176)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

150 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.2 Creating data channels

Requirement
• The data source has been created.

Procedure
To create a new data channel, follow these steps:
1. Click on the data source in which you want to create a new data channel in the navigation
area under the "Data source" folder.
The detail area "Channel management" is displayed.
2. Click the "New" button.
The configuration dialog "New - Channel" opens.

3. Select the channel type from the "Source" drop-down list. You can choose from the
following channel types:
– Energy Suite
– Modbus / TCP
– OPC DA
– OPC HDA
– OPC UA
– WINCC
– ASCII
– Desigo CC
– WinCC Unified DP
4. Specify the status of the data acquisition:
– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.
Depending on the channel type, you have to configure different settings.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 151
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

See also
Overview (Page 149)
Editing data channels (Page 174)
Data point - Administration (Page 176)
Create OPC DA, OPC HDA, OPC UA channel (Page 156)
Creating an Energy Suite channel (Page 160)
Creating a WinCC channel (Page 163)
Creating a Modbus TCP channel (Page 165)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

152 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.3 Creating an ASCII channel

With an ASCII channel you read data from ASCII file of a local system or an FTP server. After
successful configuration, transfer of the ASCII files from the directory to the Energy Manager
acquisition component is carried out automatically.

Requirements
If you obtain ASCII data from an FTP server, the following requirements apply:
• The acquisition component is logged in to the Energy Manager.
• The FTP server can be accessed.
• You have the access data for the FTP server.

Procedure
To create an ASCII channel, proceed as follows:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the new channel in the "Name" entry field.
The input of a name is required.
2. Select the entry "Ascii" from the "Source" drop-down list.
3. Specify the status of the data acquisition:
– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 153
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

4. Select one of the following entries from the "Type“ drop-down list:
– FTP
– SFTP (secure FTP)
– File (direct entry)

5. Enter the directory of the file in the "Path" entry field.

The source directory has to be specified.

Note
Ensure that there are no blank spaces in the source directory. Data acquisition is only
possible with a source directory without blank spaces.

6. Select the format of the file from the "Format" drop-down list.
7. If you have selected the type "FTP" or "SFTP", enter your access data in the entry fields "User
name" and "Password".
The access data is required.
8. Select the time interval in which the data is transmitted from the "Data transmission interval"
drop-down list. This selection corresponds to the cycle time of the IO buffer in the Energy
Manager PRO Client.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

154 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

9. Select the required data points in the navigation field.

10.Click on the "Save" button.
To add a data point to the navigation field, proceed as follows:

1. Enter the name of the data point in the "Data point" entry field.
2. Enter the address of the data point in the ASCII file in the "Address" entry field.
You can find additional information on this in the entry on the corresponding file format
in the section ASCII FTP formats.
3. In the "Data type" drop-down list, select the data type.
4. Click the "Add" button.

Result
The ASCII channel with the selected data points is created under the data source.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 155
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.4 Create OPC DA, OPC HDA, OPC UA channel

You use the channel type "OPC" to retrieve the data provided by an OPC server. The data
channel "OPC UA" ("OPC Unified Architecture") is a specification for the transmission of
process values and archive data.

Security concept
The OPC UA server uses the TCP/IP protocol for data exchange. For authorization, certificates
are exchanged between server and client. In addition, you can encrypt the data traffic.

Requirements
• The data source is logged in to the Energy Manager Server and activated.
• An OPC Server and/or an OPC Client is installed on the data source.
• An understanding of addressing and communication with OPC.
• The certificate exchange is provided for at the time that the interface is configured.

Procedure
To create an OPC channel, follow these steps:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the new channel in the "Name" text box.
The input of a name is required.
2. Select one of the following entries from the "Source“ drop-down list:
– OPC DA
– OPC HDA
– OPC UA
3. Specify the status of the data acquisition:
– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.
4. Enter the address of the OPC Server in the "OPC server name" text box.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

156 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

5. Click the "Connect" button.

The system checks whether there is a server connection. If a server connection exists, the
available servers are loaded to the "Data source" drop-down list. If there is no connection,
check your entries.
6. Depending on the selected OPC type, a distinction is made between the following three
cases for the option "Acquire historical data (HDA)":
– OPC DA: The option is not available.
– OPC HDA: The option is automatically enabled.
– OPC UA: You can enable the option. When you enable the option, you use the
functionality of an HDA channel. When you disable the option, you use the
functionality of a DA channel.
7. Select the aggregation function for an HDA channel or a UA channel with HDA functionality
from the "Aggregation" drop-down list.
The acquired values are aggregated depending on the selection. For example, if "Average"
is selected, the arithmetic mean of the reading interval is formed.
8. Select the time interval with which the data is cyclically transmitted from the "Data
transmission interval" drop-down list. This selection corresponds to the cycle time of the IO
buffer in the Energy Manager PRO Client.
9. If you want to use Online Monitoring, activate the option "Enable power monitoring". The
Online Monitoring is only available for OPC UA servers.

If you use Online Monitoring, you can create data points of the OPC server in a separate
folder structure for real-time monitoring.
Select the time interval in which the data is cyclically transmitted from the "Data
transmission interval" drop-down list.
Select the folder structure in which the data points are saved from the "Structure" drop-
down list. The folders must already exist and be part of the "Monitoring" structure.
For more information, refer to Online Monitoring in section "Online Monitoring".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 157
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

10.If the "Acquire historical data (HDA)" option is enabled, you can reload measurement data as
of a specific date. Enable the option "Override TSP settings" and select the date in the
"Retrieve data since" text field.

11.Select the server with the required data points from the "Data source" drop-down list You
have to select a "Siemens OPC UA" server.
12.Click the "Browse" button.

Note
When configuring the OPC UA server, activate at least one "Security policy" and its
associated "Security mode". Otherwise, the OPC UA server and the clients will
communicate insecurely.
During the first access to an encrypted OPC UA server instance a certificate for encrypting
the data is created. You have to accept this certificate individually in the respective server
product. You may have to perform this operation twice.
• Siemens SIMATIC NET V15: With the help of the "Siemens Communication Settings"
software in the "OPC UA certificates" menu command.
• Siemens WinCC TIA V15: Moving of the new certificates from the path "C:\Program
Files (x86)\SIEMENS\Automation\SCADA-
RT_V11\WinCC\opc\UAServer\PKI\CA\rejected\certs'" to "'C:\Program Files
(x86)\SIEMENS\Automation\SCADA-RT_V11\WinCC\opc\UAServer\PKI\CA\certs"

The available data points are loaded to the overview list.

13.Select the required data points from the available data points.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

158 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

14.If you have activated Online Monitoring, click the "Online Monitoring" tab. Select the data
points for Online Monitoring.
You can use these data points only for Online Monitoring. To be able to use the other
functions of Energy Manager with the data points of this server, create separate data
points in the usual folder structure.
15.Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The OPC channel with the selected data points is created under the data source.

Note
If you change the server address for an existing OPC UA server connection, restart the KERNEL
service via the Service Cockpit.

See also
Creating data channels (Page 151)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 159
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.5 Creating an Energy Suite channel

Data acquisition over the "Energy Suite" interface corresponds to the "OPC UA" interface. The
channel type "Energy Suite" also offers the advantage that information from the WinCC
archive of the Energy Suite is copied to Energy Manager. You therefore no longer have to
configure this information in the data points.

Security concept
The OPC UA server uses the TCP/IP protocol for data exchange. For authorization, certificates
are exchanged between server and client. In addition, you can encrypt the data traffic.

Requirements
• The data source is logged in to the Energy Manager Server and activated.
• An OPC Server and/or an OPC Client is installed on the data source.

Procedure
Follow these steps to create an Energy Suite channel:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the new channel in the "Name" entry field.
The input of a name is required.
2. Select the entry "Energy Suite" from the "Source" drop-down list.
3. Specify the status of the data acquisition:
– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.
4. Enter the URL of the WinCC Professional OPC UA Server in the "Discover URL" entry field.

5. Click the "Browse" button.

The system checks whether there is a server connection. If a connection to the server exists,
the existing archives are loaded to the "Data points" drop-down list. If there is no
connection, check your entries.
6. Select the time interval with which the data is cyclically transmitted from the "Data
transmission interval" drop-down list. This selection corresponds to the cycle time of the IO
buffer in the Energy Manager PRO Client.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

160 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

7. When you select the option "Override TSP settings", you can transmit the measurement data
again as of a specific date. Select the date in the "Retrieve data since" text field.

8. Select the required archive from the "Data points" drop-down list. You have to select a
"Siemens OPC UA" server.

9. Click "Connect".

Note
When configuring the OPC UA server, activate at least one "Security policy" and its
associated "Security mode". Otherwise, the OPC UA server and the clients will
communicate insecurely.
During the first access to an encrypted OPC UA server instance a certificate for encrypting
the data is created. You have to accept this certificate individually in the respective server
product. You may have to perform this operation twice.
• Siemens SIMATIC NET V15: With the help of the "Siemens Communication Settings"
software in the "OPC UA certificates" menu command.
• Siemens WinCC TIA V15: Moving of the new certificates from the path "C:\Program
Files (x86)\SIEMENS\Automation\SCADA-
RT_V11\WinCC\opc\UAServer\PKI\CA\rejected\certs'" to "'C:\Program Files
(x86)\SIEMENS\Automation\SCADA-RT_V11\WinCC\opc\UAServer\PKI\CA\certs"

All available data points are loaded from the archive to the overview list.
10.Select the required data points.
11.Click on the "Save" button.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 161
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

Result
The Energy Suite channel with the selected data points is created under the data source.

See also
Creating data channels (Page 151)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

162 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.6 Creating a WinCC channel

You use the "WinCC" interface to retrieve values from a process value log or compressed log.
You need a separate data channel for each log.

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
In Energy Manager Basic you can click the automatically installed WinCC channel directly in
the navigation area under the data source that was also automatically installed. To add a new
WinCC archive including the data points contained therein, click on the "Add archive" button
in the detail area. The configuration dialog "New - Channel" opens in which you define the
archive settings. For more information on creating a WinCC archive, refer to the sections
"Creating a WinCC channel" and "Data point - Administration".

Requirements
• The data source is logged in to the Energy Manager Server and activated.
• An WinCC Server and/or a WinCC Client is installed on the data source.
• WinCC projects are activated.

Procedure
To create a WinCC channel, follow these steps:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the new channel in the "Name" text box.
The input of a name is required.
2. Select the entry "WINCC" from the "Source" drop-down list.
3. Specify the status of the data acquisition:
– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.
4. Click the "Connect" button.
The system checks whether there is a server connection. If a connection to the WinCC server
exists, the WinCC archives are loaded to the "Select archive" drop-down list.

5. Select the time interval with which the data is cyclically transmitted from the "Data
transmission interval" drop-down list. This selection corresponds to the cycle time of the IO
buffer in the Energy Manager PRO Client.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 163
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6. When you select the option "Override TSP settings", you can transmit the measurement data
again as of a specific date. Select the date in the "Retrieve data since" text field.

7. Select the WinCC archive from which you want to create the data points from the "Select
archive" drop-down list.
8. Click the "Browse" button.

All available data points are loaded from the archive to the overview list.
9. Select the required data points.
10.Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The WinCC channel with the selected data points is created under the data source.

See also
Creating data channels (Page 151)
Data point - Administration (Page 176)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

164 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.7 Creating a Modbus TCP channel

You use the "Modbus" interface to retrieve data from measuring devices with Modbus support
and Ethernet interface, for example, SENTRON PAC measuring devices. The "Modbus"
interface supports the following two types:
• Modbus TCP
• Modbus RTU
Datapoints acquired by the following measuring devices are pre-configured in Energy
Manager.
• SENTRON PAC 2200 CLP
• SENTRON PAC 3200
• SENTRON PAC 4200
• ET 200SP MF HF

Note
Devices for separate listing of third-party consumption values
The SENTRON PAC 2200 CLP and Janitza UMG64 devices are required for separate listing of
third-party consumption values.

Note
Supported modules
Only the AI Energy Meter on the ET 200SP MF HF device are supported.

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
In Energy Manager Basic you can click the automatically installed Modbus TCP channel
directly in the navigation area under the also automatically installed data source. To add a
new device including the data points contained therein, click on the "Add device" button in
the detail area. The configuration dialog "New - Channel" opens in which you define the
device settings. For more information on creating a device, refer to the sections "Creating a
Modbus TCP channel" and "Data point - Administration".

Requirements
• The data source is logged in to the Energy Manager Server and activated.
• The TCP/IP connection data of the measuring device is known.
• The operating instructions of the measuring device are available.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 165
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

Procedure
Follow these steps to create a Modbus TCP channel:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the new channel in the "Name" entry field.
The input of a name is required.
2. Select the entry "Modbus/TCP" from the "Source" drop-down list.
3. Specify the status of the data acquisition:
– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.
4. Enter a meaningful device name in the "Device name" entry field.
The input of a device name is required. The device name is used on creation of the channel
for the IO buffer.
5. Enter the IP address and the associated port of the device in the in "IP address" and "Port"
entry fields.
6. Click the "Test connection" button.
The system checks whether there is a connection to the IP address entered. If there is no
connection, check your entries.
7. If this is a device with Modbus TCP interface, select the "TCP" check box. If the device is of
the Modbus RTU type, select the "RTU device" check box.
8. In the case of an RTU device, you have to enter the address of the RTU device in the "Slave
address" entry field.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

166 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

9. If you want to use data points from a device template, select the "Template" check box. If
the template does not contain your measuring device, select the "User defined" check box.

10.Define additional options for an ET 200SP MF HF or PAC 2200 CLP or PAC 4200.
– ET 200SP MF HF
Enter the offset in the "Register Offset" field.

Note
Register offset
The pre-configured datapoints correspond to the EE@Industry E3 profile. The length of
the profile for the AI Energy Meter is 53 Modbus registers.
With an additional AI Energy Meter module, the register offset starts at 54.
Via the register offset, you define the module from which data is acquired.

– PAC 2200 CLP and PAC 4200

To access historical data, enable the HDA option.

Note
HDA option for the devices PAC 2200 CLP and PAC 4200
The HDA option is available when you select the template for the devices PAC 2200
and PAC 4200. When you select the HDA option, the measuring points for the historical
data are displayed. This is relevant for third-party consumption values.

11.Select the time interval with which the data is cyclically transmitted from the "Data
transmission interval" drop-down list. This selection corresponds to the cycle time of the IO
buffer in the Energy Manager PRO Client.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 167
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

12.Select the data points you want to create.

13.You have to configure the following settings for the user-defined case ("Template" check
box not selected):
– Select the type of data point from the "Data type" drop-down list.
– Enter the address of the data point using the operating instructions of the measuring
device in the "Register", "Count" and "Subregister" entry fields.
– If you want to acquire only positive measured values, enable the option "unsigned ".
– If the device uses big endian encoding, enable the option "Big Endian".
– To create the data points, click the "Add" button.
The data points are displayed in the overview list.
14.To enable Online Monitoring, click the "Online Monitoring" tab. Select the data points and
the data transmission interval for Online Monitoring.
You can use these data points only for Online Monitoring. To be able to use the other
functions of Energy Manager with the data points of this server, create separate data
points in the usual folder structure.
For more information on Online Monitoring, refer to the section "Online Monitoring".
15.Click on the "Save" button.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

168 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

Result
The Modbus TCP channel with the selected data points is created under the data source.

See also
Creating data channels (Page 151)
Data point - Administration (Page 176)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 169
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.8 Creating a Desigo CC channel

Use the interface "Desigo CC" to read out the data saved on a Desigo CC system via the Desigo
CC web service. Energy Manager supports Desigo CC V3.0.

Requirement
• The data source is logged in to the Energy Manager Server and activated.
• The Desigo CC web server is online and can be accessed.

Procedure
To create a Desigo CC channel, follow these steps:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the new channel in the "Name" text box.
2. Select the entry "Desigo CC" from the "Source" drop-down list.

3. Specify the status of the data acquisition:

– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.
4. Enter the URL of the Desigo system in the "Desigo Server" entry field.

5. Enter your access data in the entry fields "User name" and "Password".
6. Select the interval in which the acquisition component acquires the values from the drop-
down list "Data transmission interval". This selection corresponds to the cycle time of the IO
buffer in the Energy Manager PRO Client.
7. In the entry field "Retrieve data since" you can define the time from which historical data is
retrieved.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

170 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

8. Click "Connect".
The system attempts to establish a connection. If a connection to the Desigo server exists,
the possible data sources of the server are loaded to the "System IDs" drop-down list.
If a connection exists, the color of the plug on the "Connect" button is green.
9. Select the desired system ID from the "System IDs" drop-down list.
10.Click the "Browse" button.
All available data points from the data source are loaded to the navigation field.

11.Select the desired data points for the data acquisition.

12.Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The Desigo CC channel with the selected data points is created under the data source.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 171
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.9 Creating a WinCC Unified Data Provider channel

You use the "WinCC Unified DP" interface to retrieve values from a process value log or
compressed log. You need a separate data channel for each log.

Note
Functionality of Energy Manager Basic
In Energy Manager Basic you can click the automatically installed WinCC Unified DP channel
directly in the navigation area under the data source that was also automatically installed.
You can add new data points to the data source here.

Requirements
• The data source is logged onto the Energy Manager Server and activated.
• Projects are activated and archives are created on the WinCC Unified source system.
• SIMATIC Energy Manager WinCC Unified Data Provider is installed and ready to run on the
WinCC Unified source system.

Note
You can find the SIMATIC Energy Manager Data Provider for WinCC Unified required for the
data connection on the SIMATIC Energy Manager Installation DVD under the "Options >
WinCC Unified" folder. For the installation, copy Setup.exe located in the folder to the WinCC
Unified source system and launch it. You can find more detailed information in the
installation manual under the folder "Options > WinCC Unified > Documentation".

Procedure
Follow these steps to create a WinCC Unified Data Provider channel:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the new channel in the "Name" entry field.
The input of a name is required.
2. Select the entry "WinCC Unified DP" from the "Source" drop-down list.
3. Specify the status of the data acquisition:
– Active: Data is being acquired.
– Inactive: Data is not being acquired.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

172 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

4. Enter the URL of the SIMATIC Energy Manager WinCC Unified Data Provider of the WinCC
Unified source system in the "Rest Server" text box.

5. Enter your credentials in the "User name" and "Password" text boxes that were assigned to
the connection user during the installation of the SIMATIC Energy Manager WinCC Unified
Data Provider.
6. Select the time interval with which the data is cyclically transmitted from the "Data
transmission interval" drop-down list. This selection corresponds to the cycle time of the IO
buffer in the Energy Manager PRO Client.
7. When you select the option "Override TSP settings", you can transmit the measurement data
again as of a specific date. Select the date in the "Retrieve data since" text box.
8. Click "Connect".
The system checks for a server connection. If there is a connection to the SIMATIC Energy
Manager WinCC Unified Data Provider on the WinCC Unified source system, the data
points are listed in the detail area.
9. Select the required data points.
10.Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The WinCC Unified DP channel with the selected data points is created under the data source.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 173
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.10 Editing data channels

Requirements
• The data source has been created.
• The data channel has been created.

Procedure
To edit an already created data channel, follow these steps:
1. In the navigation area under the "Data source" folder, click on the data source in which you
want to edit the created data channel.
The detail area "Channel management" is displayed.
2. Click on the data channel to be edited.
3. Click the "Edit" button.
The configuration dialog "Edit - Channel" opens.
4. Edit all configurations which you selected on creation of a data channel.

Note
When editing a data channel you can no longer change the channel type.

Note
When adding new data points of already existing data channels, the data points which are
already used in Energy Manager are grayed out. You can only create data points which do
not yet exist in the system.

5. Click on the "Save" button.

See also
Overview (Page 149)
Creating data channels (Page 151)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

174 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.11 Deleting data channels

Requirements
• The data source has been created.
• The data channel has been created.

Procedure
To delete a data channel of a data source, follow these steps:
1. Click on the acquisition component from which you want to delete the created data channel
in the navigation area under the "Data source" folder.
The detail area "Channel management" is displayed.
2. Click on the data channel to be deleted. You can select several data channels with the help
of the check boxes.
3. Click the "Delete" button.
4. Click the "Delete" button again to confirm the deletion process. As an alternative, you can
delete individual data channels from the system in the configuration dialog "Edit - Channel"
by clicking the "Delete button twice".

Result
The data channel including the substructures (process, driver source, driver, IO buffer, data
points) is deleted from the system.

Note
If the data points are linked to other objects in the system. you cannot delete the data
channel. To delete the data channel, you must first disconnect all data point links with other
objects in the system.

See also
Overview (Page 149)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 175
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

6.3.7.12 Data point - Administration

Introduction
Channel-specific data points are displayed in tabular form in Energy Manager Web. You can
create channel-specific data points from this overview table and configure existing data
points. Newly created data points and configurations on already existing data points in
Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

Overview of data point - Administration

To display the data points of a data channel, click on the corresponding data channel in the
navigation area under the data source. The following figure shows the detail area "Data point
- Administration" over the data points created in an OPC channel:

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new data points.
② Display table of existing data points per data channel.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all the columns are searched and
displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation of the data points is recommended
when a large number of data points exist per channel.
④ "Delete" button: Deleting created data points from the system.
⑤ "Clone" button: When you clone a data point, an exact copy of the data point with the name
ending in "Copy_0" is created. If you create several copies of a data point, the number at the
end of the name is incremented by one, for example, from "Copy_0" to "Copy_1". You can also
clone several data points at the same time with the help of the check boxes.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

176 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.3 Data source

The display table consists of the following eight columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual data points and any number of data points with the help of the check boxes. Click-
ing on the check box in the column header selects all data points. Clicking on the check box again in the
column header deselects all data points again.
Name Shows the name of the data point.
Description Shows the description of the data point.
Structure Shows the folder in which the data point is created.
Unit Shows the unit of the data point.
Category Shows the acquisition category of the data point.
Cycle Shows the cycle time of the data point.
Status Shows the status of the data point. If the status is set to "Active", the measurement data of the data point is
acquired. If the status is set to "Inactive", no measurement data is acquired.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.
To create a new channel-specific data point, click on the "New" button. You can find out how
to create a new data point in the section "Creating data points".
To edit a data point, click on the corresponding data point and then click the "Edit" button.
You can find out how to edit a data point in the section "Editing data points".
To delete one or more data points, select the data points and then click the "Delete" button.
Confirm the deletion process by clicking on the "Delete" button again.

Special feature of Modbus TCP

There are two display tables for Modbus TCP channels. The display table "Device view" shows
a list of all Modbus devices of the channel.
The table "Device view" consists of the following columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual devices and any number of devices with the help of the check boxes. Clicking on
the check box in the column header selects all devices. Clicking on the check box again in the column
header deselects all devices again.
Name Shows the name of the device.
Cycle Displays the cycle time of the device.
Monitoring Displays the folder structure of the device in the Monitoring area of the navigation area.
structure

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 177
Project configuration
6.3 Data source

You can also add a new device. A separate IO buffer is used for each device. Click the "New"
button to create a new device.

You can find out how to create a new device with the corresponding data points in the
section "Creating a Modbus TCP channel".
If you want to edit an existing device in the display table, select the appropriate device and
click the "Edit" button.
The display table "Data point view" has the same functionality as the view table of the other
channels. The table "Datapoint view" is only extended by the column "Device". The "Device"
column shows the device name in which the data point is saved.

Special feature of WinCC

In a similar way to the Modbus data channel, there are two display tables in the display table
of WinCC channels. The table "Archive view" shows a list of the WinCC archives.
You can also add a new archive including data points. To add a new archive, click on the
"New" button. You can find out how to select a new archive with the corresponding data
points in the section "Creating a WinCC channel".
If you want to edit an existing archive in the display table, select the appropriate archive and
click the "Edit archive" button.
The display table "Data point view" has the same functionality as the view table of the other
channels. The display table "Data point view" is only extended by the column "Archive". The
"Archive" column shows the name of the WinCC archive in which the data point is archived.

See also
Overview (Page 149)
Creating data channels (Page 151)
Creating a WinCC channel (Page 163)
Creating a Modbus TCP channel (Page 165)
Creating data points (Page 181)
Manual acquisition (Page 148)
Configuration of the data points (Page 182)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

178 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4 Data point

6.4.1 Overview
In the configuration of data points, create new data points in the Energy Manager Web client
and configure existing data points. The creation of new data points in the Energy Manager
Web client is only possible for manual and external data points. Newly created data points
and changes to already existing data points in the Energy Manager PRO Web client are also
adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.
When you click on the menu item "Data point" in the navigation area under the "Project
configuration" folder, the detail area "Data point - Administration" opens. The following figure
shows the detail area "Data point - Administration":

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new data points.
② Display table of existing data points.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all the columns are searched and displayed accord-
ingly in the display table. Delimitation of the data points is recommended when a large number of data points exist
in the system.
④ "Delete" button: Deleting created data points from the system.
⑤ "Clone" button: When you clone a data point, an exact copy of the data point with the name ending in "Copy_0" is
created. If you create several copies of a data point, the number at the end of the name is incremented by one, for
example, from "Copy_0" to "Copy_1". You can also clone several data points at the same time with the help of the
check boxes.

Note
In the "Data point" folder not all the data points in the system are displayed, but only the data
points contained in the folder.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 179
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

The data points are displayed in tabular form in Energy Manager Web: The display table
consists of the following ten columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual data points and any number of data points with the help of
the check boxes. Clicking on the check box in the column header selects all data
points. Clicking on the check box again in the column header deselects all data points
again.
Chart Opens the diagram of the data point in a new window.
Name Shows the name of the data point.
Description Shows the description of the data point.
Structure Shows the folder in which the data point is created.
Unit Shows the unit of the data point.
Category Shows the acquisition category of the data point.
Cycle Shows the cycle time of the data point.
Source Shows the data channel of the data point. Data points of the type "Generic", "Con-
stant" and "Derived" are marked with the entry "-".
Active Shows the status of the data point. If the status is set to "Active", the measurement
data of the data point is acquired. If the status is set to "Inactive", no measurement
data is acquired.
Device/Archive Shows the device name or the archive from which the data point originates.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Creating data points (Page 181)
Deleting data points (Page 198)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

180 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.2 Creating data points

Requirements
• The data source has been created.
• The data channel has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Measurement - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To create a new data point, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "New" button in the detail area "Data point - Administration".
The configuration dialog "New - Data point" opens.
2. Configure the data point using the following tabs:
– General
– Interface
– Counter
– Plausibility
– Compression
– Replacement
– MindSphere
You can find out how to configure the individual tabs in the section "Configuration of data
points".
3. When you have configured the tabs, click the "Save" button.

Result
The data point has been created in the selected folder. In the Energy Manager PRO Client the
data point is created under the IO buffer of the corresponding data channel.

See also
Datapoints (Page 57)
Creating subfolders (Page 140)
Overview (Page 179)
Data point - Administration (Page 176)
Configuration of the data points (Page 182)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 181
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.3 Configuration of the data points

6.4.3.1 Configuring general settings

Enter the basic information of the data point under "General".

Procedure
To configure the basic information, follow these steps:
1. Enter a meaningful data point name in the "Name" entry field.
2. If required, enter a description of the data point in the "Description" entry field.
3. If required, enter a KKS/AKS number or free text in the "Inventory number" check box.

If you select "KKSText" as a text type in a report, for example, the text from the entry field
is output in the report result.
4. Select the unit of the data point from the "Unit" drop-down list.
5. Select the cycle time with which the measured values are acquired from the "Cycle" drop-
down list.

Note
If you select a cycle time that does not match a compression level, only the values which
were acquired while this cycle time was configured are displayed.
If a cycle time is then selected which matches a compression level, a gap in the values
arises. The gap corresponds to the data which was acquired with the cycle time that did
not correspond to a compression level.
Configure a compression level before you select the corresponding cycle time.
Configure compression levels in the "Compression" tab.

Select the category of the data point from the "Acquisition category" drop-down list.
The input of an acquisition category is required.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

182 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6. Select the folder in which you want to create the data point from the "Structure" drop-down
list.

7. Select the country in which the data point is valid from the "Country" drop-down list.
8. When you select the option "Activate data collection", the measurement data of the data
source is acquired.
9. When you select the option "Use data point only for pre-processing", the measurement data
is only taken into account during pre-processing of the data.
10.When you enable the option "Priority high", you cannot change the values of the data point
in a matrix.
11.When you enable the option "Activate versioned data collection" the measurement data is
entered versioned in the data point.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 183
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.3.2 Configuring interfaces

Under "Interface" select the data channel from which the measured values of the data point
are acquired. Also create manual data points via the tab. More information on the data
channels is available in the section "Creating data channels".

Procedure
To configure a data channel, proceed as follows:
1. Select the data channel from which you want to create the data point from the "Channel"
drop-down list.
Only the data channels created in the system are available for selection for creating
external data points. The entry "manual" is available for creating manual data points. The
settings of the tab are adapted accordingly to the selected data channel.
2. Configure the remaining settings in accordance with the selected channel type.

Configuring a Modbus or WinCC channel

To create a Modbus or WinCC channel, configure the settings as follows:
1. Select the device/archive in which the data point is archived from the "Device" or "Archive"
drop-down list.
Only already created devices/archives are available for selection in the drop-down list.
2. Browse the corresponding device/archive.
3. Select the desired data point from the overview list.
The address of the data point in the device/archive is automatically copied to the text field
"Address".
4. Select the type of data point from the "Data type" drop-down list.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

184 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

Configuring an OPC, Energy Suite, or Desigo CC channel

To create an OPC, Energy Suite or Desigo CC channel, configure the settings as follows:
1. Click the "Browse" button.
2. Select the desired data point from the overview list.
The address of the data point on the server is copied to the entry field "Address".
3. Select the type of data point from the "Data type" drop-down list.

Configuring an ASCII channel

To create an ASCII channel, configure the settings as follows:
1. In the "address" entry field, enter the address of the data point.
2. Select the type of data point from the "Data type" drop-down list.

Creating a manual data point

To create a manual data point, configure the settings as follows:
1. Select the entry "Manual" from the "Channel" drop-down list.
2. Select the type of data point from the "Data type" drop-down list.
Only the data types "Number" and "String" are available in the drop-down list. These data
types correspond to the data types "Measurement" and "Text" from the Energy Manager
PRO Client.

Note
If a different data type is selected in the Energy Manager PRO Client, no entry is shown in
the "Data type" drop-down list.

Creating derived data point

To create a derived data point, proceed as follows:
1. Select the entry "Derived" from the "Channel" drop-down list.
2. Select the time from which the data point is automatically recalculated from the calendar
"Calculated until".
If you have not edited this field, the time up to which the data point is calculated is
displayed here.
This field is automatically updated whenever the data point is calculated.
3. Select the category of the data point from the "Category" drop-down list.
If you select "Future values", the current compression interval of the data point is
recalculated for every value.
If you select "real value", the current compression interval of the data point is calculated
after all values are available.
4. Select the compression level of the MEVA/KIP used from the drop-down list "Compression".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 185
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

5. In the entry field "Offset", enter the numerical value of the duration with which the start of
the daily interval deviates from midnight.
The daily values are calculated taking this deviation into consideration. If an Offset of 6
hours is configured, for example, the daily values from 6 am to 6 am are calculated.
6. Select the time unit of the offset from the "Offset unit" drop-down list.
7. To automatically recalculate the data point for new or updated values, activate the option
"Calculate automatically".
8. Select the value MEVA/KPI whose values are saved in the data point from the "KPI element"
drop-down list.
Alternatively, you can use the structure browser.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

186 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.3.3 Configuring counters

If you select "Count value" as the acquisition category, you must additionally create a counter.
The created counters are displayed in the list with their validity.
Click on the "Expand all" to display the detailed information of all counters, select the "Hide
all" icon to hide the detail information again. To create a new counter, click on the "Add new"
icon. To delete a counter, click the "Delete" icon and confirm the deletion process by clicking
on the icon again.

Procedure
To configure a counter, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "Add new" icon.

A new counter with the current date or with current validity is created.
2. Enter a counter number for the counter in the text box under validity.
3. From the "Installation date" drop-down list select the date of the commissioning of the
counter.

The validity range of the counter changes accordingly. If the installation date of a newly
created counter is reached, the current counter is replaced by the new counter. The
installation date of the new counter must be prior to the acquisition of the last measured
value of the current counter. Otherwise, the result could be an overflow error.
4. Enter the counter constant in the "Constant" text box.
The default setting of the counter constant is "1". The counter difference is multiplied by
this constant.
5. Enter the start of the counting range in the "Range start" text box.
6. Enter the end of the counting range in the "Range end" text box.
7. If you enable "Cyclic reset", the counter is reset to zero if a value is less than the previous
value. In this case, the difference is calculated as follows: 0 + current counter state
8. Enter the start value of the counter on installation in the "Value at installation" text box.
The start value and end value are of importance for the proper calculation of differences
upon overflow.
9. Enter the end value of the counter on replacement in the "Value at replacement" text box.
10.If you select "Only count up" from the "Counter type" drop-down list, all valid counter values
are in ascending order. If a negative counter difference is calculated, the situation is treated
as a counter overflow.
11.If you select "Count up and down", valid counter values may be greater or less than the
previous value. This option is suitable for level measurements, for example.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 187
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

12.If you enable "Filtering criteria", enter the value in the "Lower limit" text box. Any counter
values below this value are treated as invalid.
13.If you enable "Counter difference", enter the value in the "Lower limit" text box. If the most
recently calculated difference is less than this value, the current counter value is treated as
invalid.
14.If you activate "Counter difference", enter a value in the "Upper limit" text box. If the most
recently calculated difference is greater than this value, the current counter value is treated
as invalid.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

188 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.3.4 Configuring the plausibility settings

Under "Plausibility" you configure, for example, the setting of limits, the monitoring of the
data point.

Procedure
To configure plausibility settings, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the limits for the alarm range in the "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" text boxes.
2. Enter the limits for the warning range in the "Upper limit warning" and "Lower limit warning"
text boxes.
3. If you select the respective option "Notification", you will be informed of any violations of
limits.

4. To determine gaps in measured value series of the data point, enter a numerical value in the
"Gap" text box. Select the associated time from the "Unit" drop-down list. The system checks
whether there are gaps in the measured value series after the entered time has elapsed. If
you select the adjacent option "Notification", you will be informed of any existing gaps.

5. To compare the data point with itself in a different time period, select the "Another time
period" check box in the "Compare with" area. Enter the numerical value in the text box and
select the associated time period from the "Unit" drop-down list. If you select the value "1"
and the unit "1 month", for example, the current month is compared with the previous
month.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 189
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6. To compare the data point with a different data point, select the "Reference object" check
box. Select the data point to be compared from the text box.

7. Enter the upper or lower limits for the comparison in the "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" text
boxes. The limits can be exceeded or undershot by the values entered (acquisition value +
limit) before a message is generated.
8. Select the type of limit comparison from the "Compare type" drop-down list. You can choose
between "Absolute" and "Relative". "Absolute" means a numerical comparison, "Relative"
means a percentage comparison of the limits.
9. Select the "Notification" option to receive a violation message on comparison of the limits.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

190 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.3.5 Configuring the compression settings

Configure the compression levels of the measured values under "Compression". The defined
compression levels are displayed in an overview list.
Click on the "Expand all" to display the detailed information of all compression levels, select
the "Hide all" icon to hide the detail information again. To create a new compression level,
click the "Add new" icon. To delete a compression level, click on the "Delete" icon and confirm
the delete process by clicking on the icon again.

Procedure
To configure compression levels, proceed as follows:
1. To create a new compression level, click the "Add new" icon.

A new compression level is created.

2. From the "From" drop-down list select the cycle whose values you want to compress.
3. From the "To" drop-down list select the cycle to which the values are compressed.
4. From the "Compressed until" drop-down list select the time in the past from when the values
are compressed.
The "Compressed until" field shows the time up to which the compression level is
calculated. To update this field, reload the page.
To recalculate the compression level, from the "Compressed until" drop-down list select
the time in the past from when the compression value is recalculated.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 191
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.3.6 Configuring replacement value strategies

Define the substitute value strategies for measured value gaps under "Replacement".

Procedure
To configure substitute value strategies, proceed as follows:
1. Select the replacement value strategy from the "Replacement" drop-down list. You can
choose between the following replacement value strategies:
– NONE
– LRU (last recently used)
– FIS
– Replacement value
– Historical value
– Interpolation
2. If you select the replacement value strategy "NONE", gaps in the measured value series of
the data point are not replaced.
3. If you select the replacement value strategy "LRU", gaps are replaced in the measured values
series of the data point by the last valid value.
4. If you select the replacement value strategy "AKS", gaps in the measured values series of the
data point are replaced by the measured values of a different data point. In the "Source
datapoint" text box enter the data point whose values replace the gaps.
5. If you select the replacement value strategy "Replacement value", gaps in the measured
values series of the data point are replaced by a constant value. Enter the replacement value
used to close the gap in the "Value" text box.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

192 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6. If you select the replacement value strategy "Historical value", gaps in the measured values
series of the data point are replaced by a comparison value in the past. Enter the numerical
value in the "Value" text box and select the associated time period from the "Unit" drop-
down list. The system jumps back to the past by the period entered and adopts the value
from the past. This strategy can be used if the data point has a recurring pattern.

7. The "Interpolation" replacement value strategy is also available for counter data points. If
you select the "Interpolation" replacement value strategy, gaps in the counter data series are
filled by interpolation.
8. From the "Corrected until" list you select the time in the past up to which the gaps are
replaced by the selected replacement value strategy.
9. To enable the selected replacement value strategy, select the option "Replace invalids".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 193
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.3.7 Configuring MindSphere settings

Under "MindSphere" you manage the transfer of the data point to MindSphere.

Procedure
To configure MindSphere settings, proceed as follows:
1. As soon as the data point is created in MindSphere, the "Data point ID" text box is
automatically filled with the associated ID of the data point in MindSphere.
2. To select the synchronization time of the data point measured values with MindSphere, click
on the upload icon. Confirm the process by clicking on the upload icon again.

3. In the "Next upload" text box select the start time of the export to MindSphere. You can also
place the start time in the past. The synchronization date only applies to the selected data
point.
From the selected date, the values of the data point are exported with the corresponding
timestamps to MindSphere. You can thus also start export of historical values again.
During a new export, the data overwrites already existing data.
4. To enable the export of the data points measured values to MindSphere, select the option
"Mark as cloud relevant".

See also
Account settings (Page 218)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

194 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.4 Editing data points

Requirements
• The data point has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Measurement - create, remove, configure" or the
functional right "Measurement - configure".

Procedure
To edit an already existing data point, follow these steps:
1. Click on the data point to be edited in the display table.
2. Click the "Edit" button. As an alternative, you can double-click the data point to be edited.
The configuration dialog "Edit - Data point" opens.
3. You can configure all the settings again in the tabs which you defined on creation of a data
point.
4. Click on the "Save" button.

Note
Open the configuration dialog via the tree view "Tree"
If you have activated the edit mode, you can open the configuration dialog "Edit - Data Point"
directly from the tree view using the " " button for the data point.

Editing multiple data points

You can edit multiple data points at one time. If you select multiple data points from the
display table with the help of the check box, the "Edit" button is extended. If you then click on
the "Edit" button, a drop-down list opens from which you can edit the following properties:
• Status
• Unit
• Category
• Cycle time
• Compression
• Structure

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 195
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

The following figure shows the drop-down list with the configurable properties.

If you click on one of the entries, a new dialog window opens. In this dialog window you can
change the corresponding property for the selected data points. The following figure shows
the window in which the unit is changed for multiple data points.

When you click on the "Save" button, the changes are applied.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

196 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.4 Data point

Changing the data source

You can change the data source of existing data points. To change the data source, select the
new data source under "Interface" from the "Channel" drop-down list. When you select a new
data source, the settings are adapted to the new data source. In the event of a change to the
data source, the following settings are automatically adopted:
• The data point is deleted from the list of the last data source and created in the list of the
new data source.
• The prefix of the data point name is adapted to the new data channel ("e_" to "d_") and
vice versa when changing from a manual to an external data point.
• The historical data point values are retained in the new data source.
When you change the data source, check the settings in the other tabs and adapt the settings
to the new data source.

Note
Change to the data source
Changing a data source to a different data source is only possible from the "Data point"
project folder.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 197
Project configuration
6.4 Data point

6.4.5 Deleting data points

Requirements
• The data point has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Measurement - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To delete one or more data points from the system, follow these steps:
1. Click on the data point to be deleted in the display table. You can also select one or more
data points to be deleted with the help of the check boxes.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
3. Click the "Delete" button again to confirm the deletion process. As an alternative, you can
delete a data point from the system in the "Edit - Data point" configuration dialog by clicking
the "Delete" button twice.

Result
The data point is deleted from the system.

See also
Overview (Page 179)

6.4.6 Recalculating derived data point

To recalculate the values of a derived data point, follow these steps:
1. Open the "Interface" tab of the configuration dialog of the derived data point.
2. Select the beginning of the time period to be calculated from the calendar "From".
3. Select the beginning of the time period to be calculated from the calendar "From".
4. To recalculate the values of the selected period, click on the "Start" button and confirm your
entry.

Note
When you have confirmed the entry, the values are recalculated in the background
without delay. The existing values are thus lost. The "Save" button has no effect on the
recalculation of the derived data point.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

198 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.5 Parameters

6.5 Parameters

6.5.1 Overview
In the configuration of parameters you create new parameters and configure already existing
parameters in Energy Manager Web. Newly created parameters and changes to already
existing parameters in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager
PRO Client and vice versa.
When you click on the menu item "Parameters" in the navigation area under the "Project
configuration" folder, the detail area "Parameter - Administration" opens. The following figure
shows the detail area "Parameter - Administration":

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new parameters.

② Display table of existing parameters.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are searched and
displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation of parameters is recommended when a
large number of parameters exist in the system.
④ "Delete" button: Delete created parameters from the system.
⑤ "Clone" button: When you clone a parameter, an exact copy of the parameter with the name
ending in "Copy_0" is created. If you create several copies of a parameter, the number at the
end of the name is incremented by one, for example, from "Copy_0" to "Copy_1". You can clone
several parameters at the same time with the help of the check boxes.

Note
In the "Parameters" folder not all the parameters in the system are displayed, but only the
parameters contained in the folder.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 199
Project configuration
6.5 Parameters

The parameters are displayed in tabular form in Energy Manager Web. The display table
consists of the following six columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual parameters and any number of parameters with the help of the check boxes.
Clicking on the check box in the column header selects all parameters. Clicking on the check box again
in the column header deselects all parameters again.
Name Shows the name of the parameter.
Description Shows the description of the parameter.
Structure Shows the folder in which the parameter is created.
Unit Shows the unit of the parameter.
Constant Shows the replacement value of the parameter.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Creating parameters (Page 201)
Editing parameters (Page 203)
Deleting parameters (Page 204)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

200 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.5 Parameters

6.5.2 Creating parameters

Requirement
• The user has the functional right "Parameter - Common - create, remove, configure".
• The user has the functional right "Parameter - Values - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To create a new parameter, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "New" button in the detail area "Parameter - Administration".
The configuration dialog "New - Parameter" opens.
2. Enter a meaningful name for the chart in the "Name" text box.
The input of a name with the prefix "t_" is required.
3. If required, enter a description of the parameter in the "Description" text box.
4. Select the unit of the parameter from the "Unit" drop-down list.
5. Enter the constant replacement value in the "Replacement value" text box.
6. From the "Structure" drop-down list select the folder in which you want to create the
parameter.

7. If you want to define a constant value for the parameter from a specific time period, click
the "Add new" icon.
A new validity is created.
8. Select the validity date.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 201
Project configuration
6.5 Parameters

9. Enter the constant parameter value in the "Value" text box.

The value entered is valid from the selected validity time. When you define a further
validity, the parameter value applies from the current validity until the start of the new
validity. If the date of the new validity is reached, the parameter value applies from this
validity. If you do not define a validity period, the parameter adopts the value at any time
from the "Replacement value" text box.
10.Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The parameter is created in the selected folder. If you have defined a validity period including
the value, the validity period is activated. You can only deactivate the validity period by
deleting the corresponding validity period. You can delete validity periods that are no longer
required by clicking the "Delete" icon twice. If you click on the "Expand all" icon, the
information of all validity periods is displayed. If you click on the "Collapse all" icon, the
information is hidden again.

See also
Creating subfolders (Page 140)
Overview (Page 199)
Editing parameters (Page 203)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

202 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.5 Parameters

6.5.3 Editing parameters

Requirements
• The parameter has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Parameter - Common - create, remove, configure" or the
functional right "Parameter - Common - configure".
• The user has the functional right "Parameter - Values - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To edit an already existing parameter, follow these steps:
1. Click on the parameter to be edited in the display table.
2. Click the "Edit" button. As an alternative, you can double-click the parameter to be edited.
The configuration dialog "Edit - Parameter" opens.
3. You can configure all the settings again which you defined on creation of a parameter.
The input of a name with the prefix "t_" is required.
4. Click on the "Save" button.

Editing multiple parameters

You can select multiple parameters at one time. If you select multiple parameters from the
display table with the help of the check box, the "Edit" button is extended. If you then click on
the "Edit" button, a drop-down list opens from which you can edit the following properties:
• Unit
• Structure
If you click on one of the entries, a new dialog window opens. In this dialog window you can
change the corresponding property of the selected parameters. When you click on the "Save"
button, the changes are applied.

See also
Overview (Page 199)
Creating parameters (Page 201)
Deleting parameters (Page 204)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 203
Project configuration
6.5 Parameters

6.5.4 Deleting parameters

Requirements
• The parameter has been created.
• The user has the functional right "Parameter - Common - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To delete one or more parameters from the system, follow these steps:
1. Click on the parameter to be deleted in the display table. You can also select one or more
parameters to be deleted with the help of the check boxes.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
3. Click the "Delete" button again to confirm the deletion process. As an alternative, you can
delete a parameter from the system in the "Edit - Parameter" configuration dialog by clicking
the "Delete" button twice.

Result
The parameter is deleted from the system.

See also
Overview (Page 199)
Creating parameters (Page 201)
Editing parameters (Page 203)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

204 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

6.6 MEVA / KPI

6.6.1 Overview
In the configuration of KPIs (MEVAs / KPIs) you create new KPIs and configure already existing
KPIs in Energy Manager Web. Newly created KPIs and changes to already existing KPIs in
Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

Note
A KPI object in Energy Manager Web corresponds to a MEVA from the
Energy Manager PRO Client. In the following the term "KPI" is used for the expression
"MEVA / KPI".

When you click on the menu item "MEVA / KPI" in the navigation area under the "Project
configuration" folder, the detail area "MEVA / KPI - Administration" opens. The following
figure shows the detail area "MEVA / KPI - Administration":

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new KPIs.

② Display table of existing KPIs.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are searched and
displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation of KPIs is recommended when a large
number of KPIs exist in the system.
④ "Delete" button: Deleting created KPIs from the system.
⑤ "Clone" button: When you clone a KPI, an exact copy of the KPI with the name ending in
"Copy_0" is created. If you create several copies of a KPI, the number at the end of the name is
incremented by one, for example, from "Copy_0" to "Copy_1". You can clone several KPIs at the
same time with the help of the check boxes.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 205
Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

Note
In the "MEVA / KPI" folder not all the KPIs in the system are displayed, but only the KPIs
contained in the folder.

The KPIs are displayed in tabular form in Energy Manager Web. The display table consists of
the following six columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual KPIs and any number of KPIs with the help of the check
boxes. Clicking on the check box in the column header selects all KPIs. Clicking on the
check box again in the column header deselects all KPIs again.
Chart Opens the chart of the KPI in a new window.
Name Shows the name of the KPI.
Description Shows the description of the KPI.
Structure Shows the folder in which the KPI is created.
Unit Shows the unit of the KPI.
Function Shows the function type of the KPI.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Creating MEVAs / KPIs (Page 207)
Editing MEVAs / KPIs (Page 211)
Deleting MEVAs / KPIs (Page 212)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

206 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

6.6.2 Creating MEVAs / KPIs

Requirement
• The user has the functional right "Measuring Variable - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To create a new KPI, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "New" button in the detail area "MEVA / KPI - Administration".
The configuration dialog "New - MEVA / KPI" opens.

Configuring the "General" tab

To configure the "General" tab, follow these steps:
1. Enter a meaningful name for the KPI in the "Name" text box.
The input of a name with the prefix "m_" is required.
2. If required, enter a description of the KPI in the "Description" text box.
3. Select the unit of the KPI from the "Unit" drop-down list.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 207
Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

4. From the "Structure" drop-down list select the folder in which you want to create the KPI.

5. Select the compression level for the calculation of the KPI. You can choose between two
calculation types:
– Inherit from the higher level
– Always use a particular type of compression
If you select the "Inherited from the higher level" check box, the compression level is taken
from the higher level.
If you select the "Always use compression" check box, you can select the desired
compression level from the drop-down list. The selected compression level is used for all
further calculations.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

208 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

Configuring the "Formula" tab

To configure the "Formula" tab, follow these steps:
1. Select the function type of the KPI from the "Function" drop-down list.
2. Selecting the "Configurable Meva" function activates the formula editor. In the formula
editor you can enter a custom formula for calculating the KPI with the help of the adjacent
buttons. The syntax of the formula is automatically checked. In the formula editor,
placeholders are used for the selected objects. If you select the option "Show name", the
names of the selected objects are displayed in the formula editor instead of the
placeholders.
3. From the drop-down list "Select object" select the objects that you want to use for
calculating the KPI. You can use data points, parameters and other KPIs when creating a new
KPI. By selecting or clearing the "Datapoint", "MEVA / KPI" and "Parameter" check boxes you
can refine the search accordingly.
Alternatively, you can use the structure browser. To open the Structure Browser, click on
.
Selected objects are displayed with the corresponding position number in the "Currently
selected" list.
4. You can change the sequence of the objects in the list using drag and drop. You can also
delete objects that are no longer required by clicking the Delete icon.

Note
Observe the sequence of the objects. The correct sequence of the objects is required when
calculating the KPIs.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 209
Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

5. If you have selected the function "Configurable Meva", you can insert the corresponding
object in the formula editor by double-clicking an object. The position number of the object
is copied to the formula editor with the corresponding placeholder.

Figure 6-1 KPI formula editor

6. Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The KPI is created in the selected folder.

See also
Creating subfolders (Page 140)
Overview (Page 205)
Editing MEVAs / KPIs (Page 211)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

210 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

6.6.3 Editing MEVAs / KPIs

Requirements
• The KPI is created.
• The user has the functional right "Measuring Variable - create, remove, configure" or the
functional right "Measuring Variable - configure".

Procedure
To edit an already existing KPI, follow these steps:
1. Click on the KPI to be edited in the display table.
2. Click the "Edit" button. As an alternative, you can double-click the KPI to be edited.
The configuration dialog "Edit - MEVA / KPI" opens.
3. You can configure all the settings again which you defined on creation of a KPI.
The input of a name with the prefix "m_" is required.
4. Click on the "Save" button.

Editing multiple KPIs

You can select multiple KPIs at one time. If you select multiple KPIs from the display table
with the help of the check box, the "Edit" button is extended. If you then click on the "Edit"
button, a drop-down list opens from which you can edit the following properties:
• Unit
• Structure
If you click on one of the entries, a new dialog window opens. In this dialog window you can
change the corresponding property of the selected KPIs. When you click on the "Save" button,
the changes are applied.

See also
Overview (Page 205)
Creating MEVAs / KPIs (Page 207)
Deleting MEVAs / KPIs (Page 212)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 211
Project configuration
6.6 MEVA / KPI

6.6.4 Deleting MEVAs / KPIs

Requirements
• The KPI is created.
• The user has the functional right "Measuring Variable - create, remove, configure".

Procedure
To delete one or more KPIs from the system, follow these steps:
1. Click on the KPI to be deleted in the display table. You can also select one or more KPIs to be
deleted with the help of check boxes.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
3. Click the "Delete" button again to confirm the deletion process. As an alternative, you can
delete a KPI from the system in the "Edit - MEVA / KPI" configuration dialog by clicking the
"Delete" button twice.

See also
Overview (Page 205)
Editing MEVAs / KPIs (Page 211)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

212 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
Settings 7
7.1 Overview of settings
In the "Settings" folder you configure the key settings of your Energy Manager system in
Energy Manager Web. Only the administrator can define the settings. Configurations of the
settings in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and
vice versa.
You can configure the following settings:
• Mail settings
• Account settings
• Web Client settings
• User management
• Units
• Alarm lists
• Backup
• Regional settings
• Modbus device templates
• Data provider

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 213
Settings
7.1 Overview of settings

Opening settings
To open the "Settings" folder, follow these steps:
1. Click in the menu bar on "Settings".

2. Click the menu item "Settings" in the navigation area. As an alternative, you can click the
"Settings" tile in the detail area.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

214 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.1 Overview of settings

In the detail area you see an overview of the configurable settings in tile form.

3. To configure the respective settings, click on the corresponding tile in the detail area. As an
alternative, you can click on the corresponding menu item in the navigation area.

Note
The folder structures are automatically created after the installation of Energy Manager and
cannot be deleted by the user.

See also
Mail settings (Page 216)
Account settings (Page 218)
Web Client settings (Page 224)
Backup (Page 239)
Regional settings (Page 241)
User management (Page 226)
Units (Page 232)
Alarm lists (Page 237)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 215
Settings
7.2 Mail settings

7.2 Mail settings

Overview
In the "Mail settings" you manage the notifications in Energy Manager Web which inform the
user by e-mail about different situations. You can find the corresponding settings in the
Energy Manager PRO Client under the path "File > Options > Appl.". Changes to the settings in
Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.

Configuring mail settings

To configure the setting "Mail settings", follow these steps:
1. In the "Sender e-mail address" text box, enter the sender address which is used by Energy
Manager for sending e-mails automatically.
The specified sender e-mail address is checked for correctness.
2. In the "STMP server" text box enter the address of the STMP server that is used for sending e-
mails automatically.

3. If you select the option "Use server login credentials", you have to enter the user name,
password and the port number of the SMTP server in the corresponding text boxes. If you
select the "SSL" check box, the data is transmitted in encrypted form.

4. Enter the URL of the Energy Manager Web Server in the "Web server" text box.
5. In the "Mail text" text box enter the sample text for automatic sending of e-mails.
6. In the "Mail text link" text box enter the sample text for automatic sending of e-mails with
URL link.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

216 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.2 Mail settings

7. In the "Mail text alarm" text box enter the sample text of alarm messages for automatic
sending of e-mails.

8. Click on a different entry in the navigation area to save the settings.

Note
A maximum of 10 alarm messages are sent in one e-mail. If more than 10 alarm messages
are present, Energy Manager send 10 alarm messages in one e-mail. The number of pending
alarms is specified in this e-mail. Energy Manager does not send any further e-mail for the
other alarm messages.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 217
Settings
7.3 Account settings

7.3 Account settings

Overview
In the "Account settings" you configure account settings in Energy Manager Web. You can
find the corresponding settings in the Energy Manager PRO Client under the path "File >
Account settings". Configurations of the settings in Energy Manager PRO Web are also
adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.
Configure the account settings using the following tabs:
• General
• Password settings
• Data storage
• Delete options
• MindSphere

Note
If you change the text boxes of the respective tab and change the tab, for example, from
"General" to "Delete options", the changed text boxes are automatically saved. If you change
to a different object in the navigation area, the changed text boxes are also saved.

"General" tab
Enter the path in which the Account settings are stored in the "Archive base directory" text
box.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

218 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.3 Account settings

"Password settings" tab

Manage your password requirements in the "Password settings" tab. For the text boxes
"Admin password expires after (days)"" andPassword expires after (days)", you can enter a
one to five-digit number. For all other numeric text boxes you can enter a one to two-digit
number.

Note
Unsupported punctuation
Quotation marks are not supported for passwords.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 219
Settings
7.3 Account settings

"Data storage" tab

In the "Data storage" tab you manage the duration with which you save the measured values
of the corresponding cycle times in the system. You also set the archiving behavior on expiry
of the entered time. The archive directory displays the path under which the measured values
of the cycle times are saved. You can only change the archive directory in the "General" tab.
To remove the cycle times from the list, click the "Delete" icon. Click on the icon again to
confirm the deletion process. If you click on the "Expand all" icon, the details of all cycle times
are displayed. If you click on the "Collapse all" icon, the details are hidden again.
To save measured values of a new cycle time, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "Add new" button.

A new cycle time is added to the list.

2. From the "Cycle time" drop-down list select the cycle time you want to save.
3. Enter a one to six-digit number in the "Keep values" text box.
The input of a value is required.
4. Select the associated desired duration from the "Unit" drop-down list.
5. In order to archive the measured values of the cycle time after expiry of the entered duration
and then delete them, select the option "Archive after deletion".

6. In order to not archive the measured values of the cycle time after expiry of the entered
duration, but only to delete them, deselect the option.
7. Click on a different entry in the navigation area or a different tab to save the settings.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

220 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.3 Account settings

"Delete options" tab

In the "Deletion options" tab you manage the duration after the expiry of which messages
and alarms are deleted from the system. To enable the deletion process, select the respective
option. In the "Older than [days]" text box enter the time in days for the respective message
type after the expiry of which the messages are deleted. You can enter a one to six-digit
number in the respective text box. The adjacent archive paths show you where the
corresponding messages are stored before the messages are deleted.

"MindSphere" tab
You manage your MindSphere connection in the "MindSphere" tab. You can configure the
following settings:
• Uuid
In the "Uuid" text box enter your personal MindSphere login data which you receive on
activation of your MindSphere access. To receive your MindSphere login data you have to
create a "Mindconnect Lib Asset" with your MindSphere access data on the MindSphere
website. You then manually generate a connection key on the Internet for the
"Mindconnect Lib Asset". The connection key is used as a replacement for your user name
and your password. Enter the generated connection key in the "Uuid" text box.
• Upload configuration
Use the "Upload configuration" icon to export your MindSphere configuration to
MindSphere. Click on the icon to start the export. Confirm the process by clicking the icon
again. Existing configurations are overwritten by a new export.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 221
Settings
7.3 Account settings

• Server certificate
In the "Server certificate" text field only the certificate for MindSphere is displayed.

• Proxy settings
If you select the option "Use proxy", you can configure certain proxy server settings. You
have the choice between a manual proxy configuration and a configuration with specific
user login information.
To use a manual proxy configuration, select the option "Manual proxy configuration".
Enter the host name and the port of your proxy server in the corresponding text boxes.
To use specific user login information, select the option "Use specific user credentials". In
the "User name" text box enter the user name you want to use. Enter the password of the
user name in the adjacent text box "Password".
• Activate export
To enable the export of the data points to MindSphere, select the option "Export active".
The data points marked for MindSphere are only exported to MindSphere if this option is
set to active.
• Set synchronization date
Select the "Globally set synchronization date" button to set the date for the
synchronization of all data points with MindSphere. If you select your own
synchronization data when configuring a data point in the "MindSphere" tab, the
synchronization data only applies for the corresponding data point. If you click on the
"Globally set synchronization date" button, a dialog opens in which you set the
synchronization date. If the option "Mark as cloud relevant" is selected, the measured
values including timestamps of all data points are exported to MindSphere from this time
onwards. If you start a new export of historical data, already existing values are
overwritten by new values with the same timestamps.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

222 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.3 Account settings

• Export start time

From the "Minimum cycle" drop-down list select the measured values of the cycle time
you want to export. Only measured values with the selected cycle time are exported. If
there are no measured values with appropriately selected cycle time, the values of the
next higher cycle time are exported. If you want to export 15-minute values, for example,
but the data point is a daily cycle, the daily values are exported.
Select the cycle time with which the measured values are exported to MindSphere from
the "Export cycle" drop-down list.

See also
Configuring MindSphere settings (Page 194)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 223
Settings
7.4 Web Client settings

7.4 Web Client settings

Overview
In the "Web Client settings" you set the display of the Energy Manager Web user interface for
specific companies and products. You can configure the following objects:
• Product name: Title of product
• Logo: Custom logo
• Login: Custom background image of the login page of Energy Manager Web
The image for "Logo" and "Login" is adjusted automatically to the size of the user interface
during upload.
The following figure shows the detail area "Web client settings":

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

224 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.4 Web Client settings

Configuring Web Client settings

To configure the setting "Web client settings", follow these steps:
1. To use an alternative name for the product, enter the desired title of the product in the
"Product Name" text box. The name "Energy Manager PRO" or "Energy Manager Basic" is
defined by default.
The changed product name is adopted throughout the entire Web area and is displayed in
the title bar.
2. To use a company-specific logo, click the "Browse..." button under the "Logo" text field.
A dialog for selection of an image opens.
3. Select a suitable image as the logo.
The changed logo is adopted throughout the entire Web area and is displayed in the title
bar. The SIEMENS logo is set by default and by clicking the "Use default logo" button.
4. To use an alternative background image, click on the "Browse..." button under the "Login"
text field.
A dialog for selection of an image opens.
5. Select a suitable image as the background image on the login page.
The changed image is adopted as the background image on login. The SIEMENS login
screen is set by default and by clicking the "Use default login" button.
6. Click on a different entry in the navigation area to save the settings.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 225
Settings
7.5 User management

7.5 User management

7.5.1 Overview
In the setting "User Management" you create new users in Energy Manager Web and
configure already existing users. An overview of the existing users in
Energy Manager PRO Client can be found under the path "System > Configuration > User,
group, rights management > User". The creation of new users can be found in the
Energy Manager PRO Client under the path "Master data > Authorization > Insert user". Newly
created users and user configurations in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the
Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.
The following figure shows the detail area "User management":

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new users.

② Display table of existing users.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are searched and
displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation of users is recommended when a large
number of users exist in the system.
④ "Delete" button: Delete user from the system.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

226 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.5 User management

Newly created and already existing users in the system are displayed in tabular form in
Energy Manager Web. The display table consists of the following five columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual users and any number of users with the help of the check boxes. Clicking on the
check box in the column header selects all users. Clicking on the check box again in the column header
deselects all users again.
User name Displays the user name in Energy Manager.
First name Shows the first name of the user.
Last name Shows the last name of the user.
Email Shows the e-mail address of the user.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Creating users (Page 228)
Editing users (Page 230)
Deleting users (Page 231)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 227
Settings
7.5 User management

7.5.2 Creating users

Procedure
To create a new user, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "New" button in the detail area "User management".
The configuration dialog "New - User" opens.

2. Enter the personal information and location information in the "General" tab.
The input of a user name is required.
3. Click on the "Administration" tab.

4. Enter the password of the new user in the "Password" text box.
5. Confirm the password in the "Confirm Password" text box.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

228 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.5 User management

6. From the "Select group" drop-down list select the user groups to which the user is added.
The following user groups are available:
– Administrator: This user group includes comprehensive functional rights for Energy
Manager. The user group has the right to delete, add or configure all objects.
– Configurator: This user group has the right to configure Energy Manager objects but
not to delete these objects.
– Operator: This user group has the right to open and view Energy Manager objects but
not to configure or delete these objects.
– Guest: This user group does not have the right to delete, add or configure objects. The
user group also does not have the right to create new reports and to calculate
analyses. This grouping is intended to apply simple, temporary restrictions on
significant operator actions in the system.
7. The selected user groups are displayed in the "Currently selected" list.
8. To remove the user from a user group again, click the Delete icon.
9. Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The user has been created.

See also
Overview (Page 226)
Editing users (Page 230)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 229
Settings
7.5 User management

7.5.3 Editing users

Requirement
• The user has been created.

Procedure
To edit a user, follow these steps:
1. Click on the user to be edited in the detail area "User management".
2. Click the "Edit" button. As an alternative, you can double-click the user to be edited.
The configuration dialog "Edit - User" opens.
3. Configure the personal information and location information.
The input of a user name is required.
4. You can assign a new password in the password settings.
5. Under user group management you can assign the user to a new user group or remove the
user from a user group again.
6. Click on the "Save" button.

Note
You can only edit individually selected users.

See also
Overview (Page 226)
Creating users (Page 228)
Deleting users (Page 231)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

230 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.5 User management

7.5.4 Deleting users

Requirement
• The user has been created.

Procedure
To delete one or more users from the system, follow these steps:
1. Click on the user to be deleted in the detail area "User management". As an alternative, you
can also select one or more users to be deleted with the help of the check boxes.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
3. Click the "Delete" button again to confirm the deletion process. As an alternative, you can
delete a user from the system in the "Edit - User" configuration dialog by clicking the "Delete"
button twice.

Result
The user is deleted from the system.

See also
Overview (Page 226)
Editing users (Page 230)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 231
Settings
7.6 Units

7.6 Units

7.6.1 Overview
In the setting "Units" you create new units in Energy Manager Web and configure already
existing units. An overview of the existing units can be found in the
Energy Manager PRO Client under the path "System > Configuration > Extended configuration
> Unit". The creation of new units can be found in the Energy Manager PRO Client under the
path "Master data > Configuration > Insert unit". New units and configurations of existing
units in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and
vice versa.
The following figure shows the detail area "Unit - Management":

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new units.

② Display table of existing units.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are searched and
displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation of units is recommended when a large
number of units exist in the system.
④ "Delete" button: Delete units from the system.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

232 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.6 Units

Newly created and already existing units in the system are displayed in tabular form in Energy
Manager Web. The display table consists of the following four columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual units and any number of units with the help of the check boxes. Clicking on the
check box in the column header selects all units. Clicking on the check box again in the column header
deselects all units again.
Name Shows the name of the unit.
Description Shows the description of the unit.
Unit type Shows the type of unit.

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Creating units (Page 234)
Editing units (Page 235)
Deleting units (Page 236)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 233
Settings
7.6 Units

7.6.2 Creating units

Procedure
To create a new unit, follow these steps:
1. Click on the "New" button in the detail area "Unit - Management".
The configuration dialog "New - Unit" opens.

2. Enter a meaningful name in the "Name" text box.

The input of a name is required.
3. If required, enter a description of the unit in the "Description" text box.
4. Select the type of unit from the "Unit group" drop-down list.
The selection of a unit type is required.
5. Click on the "Save" button.

Result
The unit is created. The created unit can be found in the Energy Manager PRO Client under
the respective unit group.

See also
Overview (Page 232)
Editing units (Page 235)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

234 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.6 Units

7.6.3 Editing units

Requirement
• The unit is created.

Procedure
To edit a unit, follow these steps:
1. Click on the unit to be edited.
2. Click the "Edit" button. As an alternative, you can double-click the unit to be edited.
The configuration dialog "Edit - Unit" opens.
3. Edit the name, the description, if required, and the unit type.
The input of a name and selection of a unit type are required.
4. Click on the "Save" button.

Note
You can only edit individually selected units.

See also
Overview (Page 232)
Deleting units (Page 236)
Creating units (Page 234)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 235
Settings
7.6 Units

7.6.4 Deleting units

Requirement
• The unit is created.

Procedure
To delete one or more units from the system, follow these steps:
1. Click on the unit to be deleted. As an alternative, you can also select one or more units to be
deleted with the help of the check boxes.
2. Click the "Delete" button.
3. Click the "Delete" button again to confirm the deletion process. As an alternative, you can
delete a unit from the system in the "Edit - Unit" configuration dialog by clicking the "Delete"
button twice.

Result
The unit is deleted from the system.

See also
Overview (Page 232)
Editing units (Page 235)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

236 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.7 Alarm lists

7.7 Alarm lists

7.7.1 Overview
In the setting "Alarm lists" you configure existing alarm and message lists in Energy Manager
Web. The creation of new alarm lists is only possible in the Energy Manager PRO Client. You
also add one or more users to the corresponding alarm lists. The assigned users receive alarm
messages of the corresponding alarm lists. An overview of the existing alarm lists in
Energy Manager PRO Client can be found under the path "System > Configuration > KPI alert
lists". Configurations of alarm lists in Energy Manager PRO Web are also adopted in the
Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.
The following figure shows the detail area "Alarm - Management":

① "Edit" button Editing alarm lists.

② Display table of existing alarm lists.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are searched and
displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation of alarm lists is recommended when a
large number of alarm lists exist in the system.
Existing alarm lists in the system are displayed in tabular form in Energy Manager Web. The
display table consists of the following two columns:

Column Function
Name Shows the name of the alarm list.
Notification Shows the status of the alarm list. If no user is assigned to the corresponding alarm
list, the status "Inactive" is shown. If the user is assigned to the alarm list and the
option "Activate alert" is selected, alarm notification is activated. The status changes
to "Active".

When you click on the column header of one of the columns, the corresponding column is
sorted in alphabetical order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is
sorted in the reverse order.

See also
Editing alarm lists (Page 238)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 237
Settings
7.7 Alarm lists

7.7.2 Editing alarm lists

Requirement
• The alarm list is created.

Procedure
To edit an alarm list, follow these steps:
1. Click on the message list to be edited.
2. Click the "Edit" button. As an alternative, you can double-click the alarm list to be edited.
The configuration dialog "Alert list" opens.

3. Enter a numerical value in the "Value" text box.

4. Select the associated time from the adjacent "Unit" drop-down list.
The user will be informed about any existing messages in the time period entered.
5. If you select the option "Activate alert", the assigned user is informed about alarms of the
corresponding alarm list.
The status changes to "Active".
6. From the "Select user" drop-down list select the users who will receive the messages of the
corresponding alarm list. Only users with an assigned e-mail address are displayed.
The selected users are displayed in the "Currently selected users" list.
7. You can remove the assigned users again by clicking the "Delete" icon.
8. Click on the "Save" button.

Note
You can only edit individually selected alarm lists.

See also
Overview (Page 237)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

238 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.8 Backup

7.8 Backup

Overview
In the setting "Backup" you configure the automatic creation of database backups in Energy
Manager Web. You can find the corresponding settings in the Energy Manager PRO Client
under the path "Administration > Backup". Configurations of backups in Energy Manager PRO
Web are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.
With the help of the individual setting of the weekdays you can create a weekly backup plan.
The "Last backup status" text field shows when the last full and incremental backup was
created. In addition, a message is displayed as soon as no backup is found. The "Drive status"
text field shows the host name and the storage space of the archive drive.

Note
Restoring older versions
Version V7.4 does not support restoring a backup that was created with a previous version
(e.g. V7.3 or V7.2).

Configuring a backup
To configure the setting "Backup", follow these steps:
1. Enter the storage location of the backup on your PC in the "Backup directory" text box.
2. If you want to manually create a backup, click on the "Change recovery model" button. To
start the manual backup process, click on the "Backup" button.

3. Select the daily start time of the backup from the "Daily start time" text field.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 239
Settings
7.8 Backup

4. Select a backup type for each weekday from the "Backup mode" drop-down list. You can
choose an incremental, full or no backup for each weekday.

5. Click on a different entry in the navigation area to save the settings.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

240 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.9 Regional settings

7.9 Regional settings

Overview
In the setting "Regional settings" you manage location-specific settings in Energy Manager
Web. You can create new countries or delete already created countries from the system.
Already created countries with the corresponding configurations can be found in the Energy
Manager PRO Client under the path "System > Configuration > Countries". The creation of
new locations can be found in the Energy Manager PRO Client under the path "Master data >
Localization > Insert location". Changes to the regional settings in Energy Manager PRO Web
are also adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client and vice versa.
The formats for date, decimal separation and currency are automatically taken from your PC
Windows settings.

Configuring regional settings

To configure the setting "Regional settings", follow these steps:
1. Select a location from the "Country" drop-down list.
The corresponding entries of the selected location are displayed in the "Name" and
"Location" text fields.
2. If you want to create a new country, click the "Add new country" icon.

3. Enter the name of the country in the "Name" text box and the associated location in the
"Location" text box. You can also edit the name and location of already created locations.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 241
Settings
7.9 Regional settings

4. To create the new country, click the "Confirm" icon. To cancel the action, click on the
"Cancel" icon.

5. Select the corresponding country code from the "Country code" drop-down list.
6. Select the corresponding time zone from the "Time zone" drop-down list.
7. Select the language for the report evaluation from the "Report language" drop-down list.
8. To define the selected location as the default country, select the option "Default country".
9. If you want to delete a country from the system, click the "Delete country" icon. Click on the
icon again to confirm the process.
10.Click on a different entry in the navigation area to save the settings.

See also
Overview of settings (Page 213)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

242 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.10 Modbus device templates

7.10 Modbus device templates

7.10.1 Overview
In the setting "Modbus device templates" you create new Modbus templates in Energy
Manager Web and configure already existing Modbus templates. You can create, edit, delete
and export Modbus templates only in Energy Manager Web Client. New Modbus templates
and configurations of existing Modbus templates in the Energy Manager Web Client are
adopted in the Energy Manager PRO Client.
When you create or configure a Modbus channel, you can use the Modbus templates.
The Modbus templates are displayed in tabular form:

① "New" and "Edit" buttons: Creating and editing new Modbus templates.
② Display table of existing Modbus templates.
③ Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, the column Name" is searched
and corresponding templates are displayed in the display table. Delimitation of Modbus tem-
plates is recommended when a large number of Modbus templates exist in the system.
④ "Delete" button: Delete selected Modbus templates from the system.

The display table consists of the following two columns:

Column Function
Selection You can select individual Modbus templates and any number of Modbus templates
with the help of the check boxes. Clicking on the check box in the column header
selects all Modbus templates. Clicking on the check box in the column header again
deselects all Modbus templates again.
Name Shows the name of the Modbus template.
When you click on the column header of the "Name" column, it is sorted in alphabeti-
cal order. When you click on the same column header again, the column is sorted in
the reverse order.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 243
Settings
7.10 Modbus device templates

7.10.2 Exporting Modbus device templates

Requirement
• The Modbus device template has been created.

Procedure
Follow these steps to export a Modbus device template:
1. Select the desired Modbus device template from the table of the detail area "Modbus
templates - Administration".
2. Click the "Edit" button.
3. Click the "Download" button.

Result
The selected Modbus device template has been saved in the storage location for your
browser downloads. The saved template has the name in Energy Manager Web as the file
name and the data type ".ini".

7.10.3 Creating a Modbus device template

Requirements
• Do you have the functional right "Master Data > create, remove, configure"?
• An exported Modbus device template is saved in its local system.

Procedure
To create a new Modbus device template, follow these steps:
1. Edit the exported template according to your needs.
At the beginning of the automatically created templates you can find a short description
of all configurable contents for editing.

Note
The description of the contents of a template is only available in English.

2. Save the edited template in the "*.ini" file format in its local system.
3. Click on the "New" button in the detail area "Modbus device templates - Administration".
The configuration dialog "New - Modbus template" opens.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

244 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.10 Modbus device templates

4. Enter a meaningful name in the "Name" entry field. If you create a Modbus channel with a
template, the name is displayed in the "Template" drop-down list.

5. Click the "Upload" button.

A dialog window in which you can search the local data system is displayed.
6. Select the desired template from the local data system and click on the "Open" button.
The folders saved in the template with all data points are displayed in the "Template" field.
7. Click the "Save" button.

Result
The Modbus device template has been created.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 245
Settings
7.10 Modbus device templates

7.10.4 Editing a Modbus device template

Requirements
• You have the functional right "Master Data > Configure".
• The Modbus template has been created.

Procedure
To edit a Modbus template, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired Modbus template from the table of the detail area "Modbus device
templates - Administration".
2. Click the "Edit" button.
The dialog window "Edit - Modbus template" opens.
3. Configure the Modbus template as for creating a Modbus template.
4. Click the "Save" button.

7.10.5 Deleting a Modbus device template

Requirements
• You have the functional right "Master Data > create, remove, configure"
• The Modbus template has been created.

Procedure
To delete a Modbus template, follow these steps:
1. Select one or more Modbus templates from the table of the detail area "Modbus device
templates - Administration".
2. Click the "Delete" button.

Result
The selected Modbus templates are deleted.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

246 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Settings
7.11 Data provider

7.11 Data provider

You can make the data in your Energy Manager system accessible to programs and systems
via an OPC UA HDA Server. You configure the access in the "Data provider" setting.

OPC UA Server
To configure "OPC UA Server" access, proceed as follows:
1. Under "Start folder", use the structure browser to select the folders whose data is transferred
with the OPC server.
If you select a folder, the data of all nested folders will also be made accessible.
2. Specify the address of the server on which the Energy Manager is installed. Enter the
address in the following form:
opc.tcp://[IP address]:[Port]
3. Enable the security profiles used by the OPC UA HDA server.
If you have activated a security profile, a certificate exchange is performed. To access the
data via the OPC server, move the created certificate from the
/Siemens/EnMPro/OpcUaServr/pkiserver/rejected/certs folder to the
[...]/pkiserver/trusted/certs folder.
4. If you enable "Anonymous user identity", you do not need login data to access the data via
the OPC server.
If you enable "Use name identity", you can specify a user name with password to access
the data via the OPC server. The user name and the password must correspond to a user
name and the corresponding password of a user of your Energy Manager system.
If you specify the login data of an Energy Manager user, you can only access the data
points that the user can also access in the Energy Manager.
If you only enable "User name identity", you need to enter a user name with password to
access the data via the OPC server.

Note
If you configure the data provider while the server is running, the System service must be
restarted via the Service Cockpit. Changes at the OPC server are only applied after the restart
of the System service.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 247
Settings
7.11 Data provider

Additional information
The following entries are available for each data point that is made accessible by the OPC UA
server:
• Unit
• Acquisition category
• Measured values
If several compression levels are configured for the data point, the lowest compression
level is made available.
The entry on the measured values has the following label: [Data point
name]_[Compression level]
If a data point is configured as a counter, additional measured values are provided that are
compiled as counters. This entry has the following label: [Data point
name]_CNT_[Compression level]

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

248 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
Notification Center 8
The "Notification Center" provides an overview of all generated alarms, warnings and
comments for each asset.
To open the "Notification Center", click on the "Notification Center" icon in the menu bar.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 249
Notification Center

Structure
When you open the Notification Center, you will see an overview of all alarms for each asset.

① The overview shows you how many assets have data points with alarms, warning or comments.
② The asset overview shows you how many alarms, warnings or comments are occurring in an
asset.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

250 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Notification Center

To open the detail view of an asset, click on it.

① This area shows all data points with alarms, warning or comments.
② The detail view of the asset shows all alarms.

You have the following options to filter for specific alarms:

• Filter for alarms during a specific period in the detail view of the asset.

• Filter for type of alarm

– All
Shows all types of alarms.
– Alarms
Shows only alarms.
– Warnings
Shows only warnings.
– Comments
Shows only comments.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 251
Notification Center

• Filter for alarm status

– All
Shows all alarms.
– Confirmed
Shows all confirmed alarms.
– Not confirmed
Shows all not confirmed alarms.
• Filter for alarms at specific data points in the "Data points" area.
When you select a data point, you will see the chart icon in the detail view. To open the
chart of the data point in a new window, click on the icon.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

252 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
Service Cockpit 9
9.1 Overview
To open the Service Cockpit, click on the icon .
To open the Service Cockpit in Energy Manager Web, you require the functional rights
"Service Cockpit > view" and "Master Data > view".

Setup
The following figure shows the Service Cockpit:

① Navigation area
② Selection of detailed information
③ Display of services
④ Detailed information

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 253
Service Cockpit
9.2 Navigation area

9.2 Navigation area

The navigation area displays all available acquisition components and the application server.
The following figure shows the navigation area:

To display the function dialog of the acquisition component in the detail area, click on the
entry of the acquisition component in the navigation area.
To display all acquisition channels of an acquisition component in the navigation area, click
on the item of the acquisition component and then on the "Available channels" item.
The status of the acquisition components and channels is displayed via the color of the
corresponding icon:

Color Acquisition component status Channel status

Green At least one acquisition component is Data acquisition of the channel is active.
active. There is no gap.
There is no gap in any channel of the
acquisition component.
Red At least one acquisition component is The channel is connected to the system.
active. There is a gap.
There is no gap in at least one channel of
the acquisition component.
Gray All channels of the acquisition compo- The channel is not connected to the sys-
nents are not connected or are inactive. tem or is inactive.

The entry "Available channels" has the same status display as the corresponding acquisition
component.
If you hold the mouse pointer over the entry of a channel, the ID of the process is displayed
via a tooltip.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

254 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Service Cockpit
9.3 Services

9.3 Services
Depending on the use of the selected system component, the corresponding services are
displayed:

System com- Energy Manager Service

ponent
Application • Database service (Database)
server
• Report service (Reporting)
• Portal service (Portal)
• Calculation service (Calculation)
• System service (System)
Acquisition • Portal service (Portal)
component
• Acquisition service (Acquisition)
• Kernel service (Kernel)

If a server is used as the acquisition server and application server, all listed services are
displayed.

Status display
The status of the services is indicated by the color of the icon:

Color Status
Service is running

Service is stopped

Service is stopped

Start, restart and stop of services

To control services, click on the icons in the following table:

Symbol Function
Start service
Restart service
Stop service

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 255
Service Cockpit
9.4 System

9.4 System
To call up this field, click on system component in the navigation area and the "System" tab in
the selection of the detailed information.

Information
This field shows the following general information for the corresponding servers:

Application server Acquisition component

• The Energy Manager version used by the sys- • The Energy Manager version used by the sys-
tem tem
• The time of the last contact with the acquisi-
tion system
• The system time

The system field shows the following hardware information for all servers:
• A list of the hard disks and their usage
• The CPU load
• The currently used work memory

9.5 Installed software

To call up this field, click on system component in the navigation area and the "Installed
software" tab in the selection of the detailed information.

Setup
This field shows a table with the following information:
• The programs installed on the server
• The version of these installed programs
Sort the list via the column headers.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

256 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Service Cockpit
9.6 Log files

9.6 Log files

To call up this field, click on system component in the navigation area and the "Logs" tab in
the detailed information selection.
The following figure shows an overview of the "Logs" field:

① Table with log files

② Filter
When you enter a text in the "Filter" text box, all columns are searched and displayed accordingly in the table. De-
limitation is recommended when a large number of log files exist in the system. Click on a column header to sort
the corresponding column alphabetically.
③ Update
Updates the table with the log files.
④ Open
Opens the log file in the Energy Manager Web Client.
⑤ Download
Downloads the selected log file to your local system via your browser download. If several log files are selected, this
button is disabled.
⑥ Delete
Deletes all selected log files.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 257
Service Cockpit
9.6 Log files

The table with the log files contains the following information:

Name of the column Content of the column

Service Name of the corresponding Energy Manager service
Component Name of the associated subcomponent of the service
File Name of the log file
Size Size of the log file in kilobytes
Date changed Time of last change

View of the log file

The following figure shows a log file in the Energy Manager Web Client:

① Table with the messages

② Column filter
To filter a column, click on the corresponding filter. Then select the entries by which the column is to be filtered.
③ Filter
When you enter a text in the "Filter" text box, all columns are searched and displayed accordingly in the table. De-
limitation is recommended when a large number of log files exist in the system. Click on a column header to sort
the corresponding column alphabetically.
④ Export as CSV
Downloads the selected log file in CSV format to your local system via your browser download.
⑤ Cancel
Closes the view of the log file.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

258 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Service Cockpit
9.6 Log files

⑥ Update
Updates the log file
Next log file
If the latest log file with this name is not open, this button shows an arrow.
To open the next log file, click on this button.
⑦ Previous log file
Opens the log file with the same name that was created before this log file.

The log file messages table contains the following information:

Name of the column Content of the column

Date Time stamp of the message
Process ID ID of the channel to which the message provides information
Components Component from which the message originates
Log level Message type:
• INFO = Information
• WARNING = Warning
• ERROR = error
Log information Contents of the message

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 259
Service Cockpit
9.7 Gap recognition

9.7 Gap recognition

To open a list of acquisition gaps of a channel, click on the channel in the navigation area of
the service cockpit. When you click on "Available channels" in the navigation area, the list for
the top channel is displayed in the navigation area. You can check the functionality of data
acquisition with the help of gap recognition.

① Table with all gaps of the channel

② Filter function: When you enter a text in the "Filter" entry field, all columns are
searched and displayed accordingly in the display table. Delimitation is recommended
when there is a large number of gaps.
③ "Acknowledge":
To acknowledge a gap, select the corresponding gap from the table and click twice
on this button.
The gap is deleted from the list. When all gaps are acknowledged, the status of the
channel is set to green.
④ "Refresh"
Click on this button to update the table with the gaps.

The display table contains three columns:

Column Function
Data point Data point of the gap
Description Description of the data point
Time stamp Time stamp of the gap

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

260 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Service Cockpit
9.8 Troubleshooting with log files

9.8 Troubleshooting with log files

9.8.1 Kernel fault

You can find more information on the log file in the reference under "Kernel".

Requirements
• You have the functional right "Administration > Logging Viewer > View"
• You have the functional right "Administration > Service Cockpit > View"
• The Service Cockpit in the web client is open.

Raw values are missing in the chart with compression level acquisition values
If the acquired measured values of the data source are not visible in the chart, proceed as
follows to locate the problem:
1. Check whether the following services are running:
– Kernel service (Kernel)
– Acquisition service (Acquisition)
– Portal service (Portal)
If the icon of the service is green, the service is running.
2. Open the latest log file of the Kernel Service via the detail information "Log files".
To facilitate the search, use the "Filter" function and sort the column "Last change"
3. Search the log file for errors.
Messages of category 3000 are error messages.
Identify the interface at which the error is present using the process ID.
4. With the help of the log file check whether values arrive in the kernel and are passed on.
5. Check whether the acquired measured values are written to the raw files.
The raw files can be found in the directory "Installation directory\GUI\mcl\RawFiles".
You can find additional information on raw files in the following section.

Raw files
Values acquired from the data sources are stored in raw files by default. A folder is created at
midnight local time for each day. As soon as the first value is acquired, a raw file is created in
this folder for each data point.
The name of the raw file consists of the ID of the data point. You can read the ID of the data
point in the configuration dialog of the data point.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 261
Service Cockpit
9.8 Troubleshooting with log files

9.8.2 Acquisition service error

You can find more information on the "Compression" log file in the reference under
"Compression".

Requirements
• You have the functional right "Administration > Logging Viewer > View"
• You have the functional right "Administration > Service Cockpit > View"
• The Service Cockpit in the web client is open.

The acquired measured values are visible, the 15-minute values are not.
If the acquired measured values are visible and values of the "15 minutes" compression level
are not visible, proceed as follows to locate the problem:
1. Open the latest log file "Compression".
2. Check whether values were compressed for the corresponding time stamp. Filter the log file
by the identifier "CMPR".
3. Filter in the log file by the identifier "RCAL" to display the compressed interval and the
number of compressed values.
4. To check whether the compressed values were uploaded to the SQL server, open the log file
"Synchronisation" of the acquisition service.

The local database of the acquisition component does not work.

If the local database of the acquisition component does not work, error messages are
displayed in the log files "Compression", "Kernel" and "Synchronisation".
Open the log file "SQL Provider". This log file should be empty. If there are error messages in
this log file, the local database is corrupt.

Alarms for acquisition values are not generated

If no alarms are generated in the event of limit violations in the values with the compression
level "Acquisition values", proceed as follows:
1. Open the latest log file "Compression".
2. Filter the log file by the identifier "PLSI".
3. Check whether limit violations have been detected.

Gaps are not detected

If no gaps are detected in the acquired values, carry out troubleshooting as follows:
1. Open the latest log file "Compression".
2. Filter the log file by the identifier "Gap".
3. Check whether gaps have been detected.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

262 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Service Cockpit
9.8 Troubleshooting with log files

9.8.3 Reporting service error

For more information on the "Recalculation" log file, see the reference under "Recalculation".
For more information on the "MEVA calculation" log file, see the reference under "MEVA
calculation".

Requirements
• You have the functional right "Administration > Logging Viewer > View"
• You have the functional right "Administration > Service Cockpit > View"
• The Service Cockpit in the web client is open.

Daily values in matrix but no monthly values calculated

If you entered the daily values in a matrix, yet no monthly values were calculated, carry out
troubleshooting as follows:
1. Open the latest log file "Recalculation".
2. Filter the log file by the identifier "ACOP".
3. Check to see whether compression is still pending.
4. Filter the log file by the identifier "RCAL".

Derived data points are not calculated automatically

If derived data points are not calculated automatically even though the data point is
configured accordingly, carry out troubleshooting as follows:
1. Open the latest log file "Recalculation".
2. Filter the log file by the identifier "DCAL".
3. Check to see whether recalculation is still pending.
4. Filter the log file by the identifier "RCAL".

MEVA/KPI is not calculated

If a MEVA/KPI is not calculated, carry out troubleshooting as follows:
1. Open the Logging Viewer in the Energy Manager Pro Client.
For more information on the Logging Viewer, refer to the section "Logging Viewer"
2. Search for error messages of the MEVA/KPI in Logging Viewer.
3. Open the log file "MEVA calculation".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 263
Service Cockpit
9.8 Troubleshooting with log files

Substitute values are not calculated for manually acquired daily values
If the substitute values are not calculated for gaps of manually acquired daily values, carry out
troubleshooting as follows:
1. Open the latest log file "Recalculation".
2. Filter the log file by the identifier "REPV".
3. Check whether gaps have been detected.
4. Filter the log file by the identifier "RCAL".
5. Check whether substitute values were generated.

Interpolation of monthly values does not work

If the interpolation of monthly values does not work, carry out troubleshooting as follows:
1. Open the latest log file "Recalculation".
2. Filter the log file by the identifier "EXPA".
3. Check whether interpolation or extrapolation was performed.
4. Filter the log file by the identifier "RCAL".
5. Check whether an interpolated or extrapolated value was created.

9.8.4 Reporting service error

You can find more information on the "Report Server" log file in the reference under "Report
Server".

Requirements
• You have the functional right "Administration > Logging Viewer > View"
• You have the functional right "Administration > Service Cockpit > View"
• The Service Cockpit in the web client is open.

Reports are not generated

If only the first green check mark is displayed after starting a report, or an automatically
calculated report is not displayed, carry out troubleshooting as follows:
1. Open the log file "Report Server".
2. Filter the log file by the ID of the report.
3. Search for error messages.
If macros and Visual Basic were not activated in the EXCEL settings, this error occurs.
4. Check whether a default printer is defined in the operating system.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

264 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
Reference 10
10.1 Correction status of a value
Each acquired value in Energy Manager has a correction status. The correction status
indicates whether and how a measured value was corrected. You can see and change the
correction status of a value in the matrix or the measured value editor.
Values with a different correction status than "Valid" are displayed in orange in the report.
Values are displayed independently of the capture status in the chart and reused in MEVAs.
The following value correction states are possible:
• Valid
If a value was not corrected, the value has this correction status.
• Valid with manual manipulation
If a value in the matrix or the measured value editor is overwritten, the value receives this
correction status.
• Corrected
If a value is automatically corrected by the system, the value receives this correction
status.
Example: If the counter value difference (consumption) does not correspond to the filter
criteria, this value is automatically corrected.
• Corrected with LRU
If a missing value is inserted via the substitute value strategy "LRU", the value receives this
correction status.
• Corrected with substitute measurement
If a missing value is inserted via the substitute value strategy "AKS", the value receives this
correction status.
• Corrected with substitute value
If a missing value is inserted via the substitute value strategy "Substitute value", the value
receives this correction status.
• Invalid
You can give values this correction status. Values with this correction status are not
processed further in the MEVAs.
• Valid corr. with LRU and manual manipulation
This correction status is not assigned automatically.
If a value with the "Corrected with LRU" status is overwritten in the matrix or measured
value editor, the value keeps this status. To mark such values accordingly, you can give
these values the correction status "Valid corr. with LRU and manual manipulation".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 265
Reference
10.1 Correction status of a value

• Valid corr. with substitute value measurement and manual manipulation

This correction status is not assigned automatically.
If a value with the "Corrected with substitute measurement" status is overwritten in the
matrix or measured value editor, the value keeps this status. To mark such values
accordingly, you can give these values the correction status "Valid corr. with substitute
value measurement and manual manipulation".
• Valid corr. with substitute value and manual manipulation
This correction status is not assigned automatically.
If a value with the "Corrected with substitute value" status is overwritten in the matrix or
measured value editor, the value keeps this status. To mark such values accordingly, you
can give these values the correction status "Valid corr. with LRU and manual
manipulation".

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

266 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.2 Time unit abbreviations

10.2 Time unit abbreviations

Abbreviation Time unit

d Day
h Hour
Y Year
M Month
min Minute
s Second
W Week

10.3 Unit conversion Energy/Power

Energy Power
J J/h
kJ kJ/h
MJ MJ/h
GJ GJ/h
Ws Ws/h
Wh W
kWh kW
GWs/h
GWh GW
TWh TW
VArh VAr
kVArh KVAr
MVArh MVAr
GArh GVAr
VAh VA
kVAh kVA
MVAh MVA
GVAh GVA
Nm3 Nm3/h
m3 m3/h
l l/h
hl hl/h
kg kg/h
t t/h
tCO2 tCO2/h
pce pce/h
pce pce/h

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 267
Reference
10.4 Existing functional groups

10.4 Existing functional groups

Overview of functional groups

The following table shows the functional groups available after the installation of Energy
Manager. In Energy Manager Basic no functional groups can be created or modified. Which
group has which functional rights is described in the following chapter Available functional
rights.

Functional group Function

ADMINISTRATOR This group includes comprehensive functional rights for Energy Manager.
This group has the right to delete, add or configure all objects.
CONFIGURATOR This group has the right to configure Energy Manager objects.
GUEST This group is permitted to view all objects in the tree.
This group does not have the right to delete, add or configure objects. The group
also does not have the right to create new reports and to calculate analyses.
This grouping is intended to apply simple, temporary restrictions on significant
operator actions in the system.
To set up explicit, long-term restrictions on functional rights, you should use a
combination of the following functional groups.
OPERATOR This group has the right to operate Energy Manager objects.

10.5 Available functional rights

In Energy Manager you can restrict functions for unauthorized users. For example, you can
assign a user the right to start a report and view the result. You can, however, disallow the
user from configuring the report. You can also merge several users to form several user
groups. The user Admin or Superadmin sets the user rights for the corresponding users and
user groups as well as the functional restrictions in the functional user group. Most functional
restrictions in Energy Manager are based on the following basic principle:
1. Configuration
2. Creation, deletion and configuration
3. View

Configuration
The user is authorized to configure objects using the configuration dialog. The user is not
authorized to delete objects or create new objects.

Creation, deletion and configuration

The user is authorized to configure and delete objects and create new objects.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

268 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.5 Available functional rights

View
The user is authorized to open objects and view the contents. The user is not authorized to
configure or delete objects or create new objects. Some objects such as a MEVA can only be
viewed by the user in the navigation area without opening a dialog. In the corresponding
object properties you can find out whether you can open the object and view the contents or
only see the object in the navigation area.
The user is also not authorized for the following functions:
• Copy
• Clone
• Delete
• Cut
• Disconnect

Overview
The following table provides an overview of the available functional rights:
The letters in brackets indicate which functional groups have this right after installation of the
Energy Manager .
The letters stand for the following functional groups:
• A: Administrator
• C: Configurator
• O: Operator
• G: Guest

Rights area Assigned rights

Account Configuration:
• Create, remove, configure: The user has the right to create, delete and configure accounts.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view accounts.
Administration Logging Viewer:
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view the Logging Viewer.
Service Cockpit:
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view the Service Cockpit.
Alarming Configuration:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure KPI message lists.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure KPI
message lists.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view KPI message lists.
Values:
• Acknowledge (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and confirm messages.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view messages.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 269
Reference
10.5 Available functional rights

Rights area Assigned rights

Backup Configuration:
• Configure (A): The user has the right to open and configure the storage location of the back-
up and the schedule for automatic creation of a backup.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view the storage location of the backup
and the schedule for the automatic creation of a backup.
Usage (A):
• Start: The user has the right to create a backup.
Chart Object Configuration:
• Configure (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and configure charts.
• Create (A, C, G): The user has the right to open and create charts.
• Delete (A, C, G): The user has the right to open and delete charts.
Client Control To log onto a component, the "Client Control" right is the minimum right for the user.
Acquisition:
• Configure(A): The user has the right to configure acquisition components.
Client:
• Configure (A, C ,G, O): The user has the right to configure the Energy Manager PRO Client.
Web:
• Configure (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to configure Energy Manager PRO Web.
Domain Configuration:
• Create, remove, configure: The user has the right to create, delete and configure domains.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view domains.
Object Assignment:
• Modify (A): The user has the right to configure assignments of domains.
• Share (A): The user has the right to assign domains.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view assignments of domains.
Energy Efficiency Configuration:
• Configure (A, C, G): The user has the right to open and configure energy efficiency measures.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C, G): The user has the right to create, delete and configure
energy efficiency measures.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view energy efficiency measures.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

270 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.5 Available functional rights

Rights area Assigned rights

ERP Connector Business Unit:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure Business Units.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure Busi-
ness Units.
• View (A, O): The user has the right to open and view Business Units.
Cost Center:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure cost centers.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure cost
centers.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view cost centers.
Cost center relation:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure the cost center relation.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure the
cost center relation.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view the cost center relation.
Cost element:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure cost elements.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure cost
elements.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view cost elements.
File Common:
• Configure (A, C, G): The user has the right to open and configure files.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to create, delete and configure
files.
Data:
• Fetch (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open documents from a file.
• Modify (A, C, G): The user has the right to upload documents or overwrite existing docu-
ments.
Folder • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure folders.
• Create, delete (A, C): The user has the right to create and delete folders.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view folders.
Import and export Export:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to export subprojects to an XML file.
Import:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to import subprojects.
Job • Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure job
queues.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view job queues.
Licensing Config:
• Configure (A): Not relevant for Energy Manager PRO V7.4.
• Create, remove, configure (A): Not relevant for Energy Manager PRO V7.4.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view the license dialog.
Left • Modify (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to delete links from data points and documents.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 271
Reference
10.5 Available functional rights

Rights area Assigned rights

Locking Configuration:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to lock objects.
Loop, Prototype • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure loops and prototypes.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure loops
and prototypes.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view loops and prototypes.
Master Data • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure cycle times and query types.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure cycle
times and query types.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view cycle times and query types.
Matrix • Create, remove, modify (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure matri-
ces.
• Modify (A, C, O): The user has the right to configure matrices.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view matrices.
Measured Value • Insert, remove, modify (A, C): The user has the right to enter measured values of a data
source in the matrix or measured value editor and delete and configure them.
• Modify (A, C): The user has the right to open measured values of a data source and enter
them in the matrix or measured value editor.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view measured values of a data source.
Measurement • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure data points.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure data
points.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view data points.
Measuring Variable • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure MEVAs.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure ME-
VAs .
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view MEVAs.
ODBC Connector Configuration:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure ODBC data sources.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure ODBC
data sources.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view ODBC data sources.
Import values (A, C):
The user has the right to import values from an ODBC data source.
Parameter Common:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure parameters.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure pa-
rameters.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view parameters.
Values:
• Create, remove, configure (A, C, G): The user has the right to create, delete and configure
parameter values.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

272 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.5 Available functional rights

Rights area Assigned rights

Permission • Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure func-
tional groups.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view functional groups.
Printer • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure printers.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure print-
ers.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view printers.
Production Plan This rights group is only relevant if the license "Forecast and planning" exists in the ALM.
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure production plans.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and import produc-
tion plans.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view production plans.
Profiles • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure profiles.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure pro-
files.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view profiles.
Quick Chart Comments Configuration:
• Configure (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and configure comments in charts.
• Create (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and create comments in charts.
• Delete (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and delete comments in charts.
Report Configuration:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure reports.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure re-
ports.
• View (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view reports.
Report:
• Open pdf only (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view created reports only in
PDF format.
• Open xls/doc/pdf (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to open and view created reports in
Excel, Word and PDF format.
• Restart, start (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to manually start reports and restart already
created reports via task management.
• Start, delete (A, C, G, O): The user has the right to manually start reports and delete already
created reports.
Task management Configuration:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure tasks.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure tasks.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view tasks.
Task management:
• Start (A, C): The user has the right to start tasks.
Template Manager You configure reports and machine specifications in the Template Manager.
Configuration (A, C):
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure templates.
• Create (A, C): The user has the right to create new templates.
• Delete (A, C): The user has the right to delete templates.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 273
Reference
10.5 Available functional rights

Rights area Assigned rights

Trend Not relevant for Energy Manager PRO V7.4.
Unique Objects Not relevant for Energy Manager PRO V7.4.
Unit • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure units.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure units.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view units.
User • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to open and configure other users.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure other
users.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view other users.
Visualization Not relevant for Energy Manager PRO V7.4.
Web interface Administration:
• Configure (A, C): The user has the right to configure the Siemens logo and start screen in the
Energy Manager PRO Web administration area.
Menu:
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to view the Energy Manager PRO Web menu and toggle
between the tree structure and the administration area.
Quicklinks:
• Configure (A, C, O ): The user has the right to open and configure Quicklinks in Energy Man-
ager PRO Web.
• Create (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and create Quicklinks in Energy Manager PRO
Web .
• Delete (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and delete Quicklinks in Energy Manager PRO
Web.
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view Quicklinks in Energy Manager PRO
Web.
Widgets/Dashboards • Configure (A, C): The user has the right to configure dashboards and create, delete and con-
figure widgets in Energy Manager PRO Web.
• Create, remove, configure (A, C): The user has the right to create, delete and configure dash-
boards and widgets in Energy Manager PRO Web .
• View (A, C, O): The user has the right to open and view dashboards and widgets in Energy
Manager PRO Web.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

274 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.5 Available functional rights

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 275
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

10.6 Functions for measuring variables

General information
Energy Manager has implemented a set of standard functions for MEVA processing. Siemens
AG reserves the right to create any new evaluation algorithms that may be needed, including
their implementation in the system. As a general rule:
• The query type determines the observation period.
• The calculation results relate to the respective observation period that is transferred at the
start of an evaluation (From, To).
• The cycle time and the compression level determine the initial interval.
• The calculation interval determines the interval of the result.
• Multiple results can be displayed within the observation period for protocol MEVAs.
• The observation period and the calculation interval are identical for balance MEVAs and
derived data points.
• For derived data points, the observation period or the calculation interval is determined by
the cycle time of the derived data point.
The following must be observed for the units of the results:
• If the result of a MEVA function is returned in a specific unit, the result is displayed with
[unit].
• If the result of a MEVA function always returns the value 1, the result is displayed with [1].
• If there is no further monitoring regarding the unit of a MEVA function result, the result is
displayed with [x].

Note
The order of the data points, MEVAs and parameters in the listing under "Inputs:" and in the
Client (see figures) is mandatory because the functions expect the input values in this order.

Requirement
Successful installation of all software components.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

276 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

MEVA functions
The following table shows all the available MEVA functions:

Function Description
Addition with cross sum Addition with cross sum (ID: 2694)
Forms the sum of the n data point values for each time stamp. Re-
turns the sum of the sums contained therein for each calculation
interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
d_Data_point_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM (d_Data_point_1 + d_Data_point_2 + … +
d_Data_point_n)
Additional info:
If MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN in Energy Manager Options is set to 0, no
check for gaps in the time series (15 min) is performed. 1 means
that the check is performed. Only active if MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD
is disabled (= 0).

Addition Addition (ID: 1795)

Adds the results of the n MEVA/datapoint/parameter inputs.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
m_MEVA_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] =m_MEVA_1 + m_MEVA_2 + ... + m_MEVA_n

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 277
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Number of records Number of data records (ID: 1740)

Calculates the number of measured values within the calculation
interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[1] = Number of measured values within the calculation
interval.

Number of starts Number of starts (ID: 1771)

Calculates the number of changes from 0 to 1 within the calculation
interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point (contains only 0 and 1)
The function returns:
RESULT[1] = Number of changes from 0 to 1 within the calculation
interval.

Observation period in hours Observation period in hours (ID: 1741)

Calculates the duration of the calculation interval.
Inputs:
not necessary.
The function returns:
RESULT[h] = Duration of the calculation interval.

Inventory change Inventory change (ID: 2904)

Adds the result of the Meva to the value of the previous period of
the derived data point and writes the result in the current period of
the derived data point. The result is also returned as a Meva result
and can thus be output to a protocol module, for example.
Inputs:
a_Data_point
m_MEVA

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

278 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Operating hours Operating hours (ID: 1729)

Operating hours
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
VALUE[s] = Sum of periods of validity of the specified data point
within the monitoring period.

Operating hours conditionally Operating hours conditionally (ID: 2688)

Conditional operating hours
Inputs:
d_Data_point
t_Parameter
The function returns:
RESULT[s] = Sum of valid periods of the specified data point within
the observation period minus the valid periods with data point value
not exceeding 0 ± parameter value.

Difference from DP Difference from DP (ID: 2812)

If the value in m_MEVA_1 is not m_MEVA_2, the value in
m_MEVA_1 is returned. Zero is returned if both MEVAs do not pro-
vide a value.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
The function returns:
If the value in m_MEVA_1 is not m_MEVA_2, the value in
m_MEVA_1 is returned. Zero is returned if both MEVAs do not pro-
vide a value.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 279
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Difference snapshot Difference snapshot (ID: 2875)

Difference from two measured values of the connected data point.
The first time is specified by the parameter in decimal notation (e.g.:
1.5 = 01:30 h). The second measured value is derived from the
same time of the previous day. An interval shorter than one day
returns the same result as an interval duration of one day.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
t_Parameter

Division Division (ID: 2853)

Divides the results of the n MEVA/datapoint/parameter inputs.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
m_MEVA_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = m_MEVA_1 / m_MEVA_2 / ... / m_MEVA_n

Energy input Energy input (ID: 1731)

Energy input without inclusion of parameter changes
Inputs:
m_MEVA (quantity, e.g. coal supplied [t])
t_Parameter (calorific value, for example, calorific value of coal
[MWh/t])
The function returns:
RESULT[MWh] = Energy input[MWh] = m_MEVA[t] *
t_Parameter[MWh/t]

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

280 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Energy input oil Energy input oil (ID: 1773)

Calculation of energy input from oil, temperature compensated with
inclusion of parameter changes
Inputs:
t_Parameter_1 (reference density [t/m³])
t_Parameter_2 (reference temperature [°C])
t_Parameter_3 (correction factor [1/°C])
d_Data_point_1 (operating temperature [°C])
d_Data_point_2 (flow [m³/h])
t_Parameter_4 (calorific value [MWh/t])
The function returns:
RESULT[t] = Energy input[t] = SUM( d_Data_point_2 * validity peri-
od *( t_Parameter_1 + (( t_Parameter_2 - d_Data_point_1 ) *
t_Parameter_3 )) * t_Parameter_4 ) / 3600

First value First value (ID: 2764)

Calculates the first measured value in the calculation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = First value in the calculation interval.

GTZ DTF (daily temperature figures ID: 2912)

Calculates the DTF.
Inputs:
d_Data_point (temperature)
t_Parameter_1 (room temperature)
t_Parameter_2 (heating limit)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM(t_Parameter_1 - daily averages)
If daily average > t_Parameter_2, then difference = 0.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 281
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

GTZ 20/15 GTZ 20/15 (ID: 2862)

Calculates the GTZ 20/15 (heating limit 20°C).
Inputs:
d_Data_point (outdoor temperature)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM (difference of the daily averages to 20 degrees)
If daily mean value > 15 degrees, then difference = 0.

Additional info:
The daily average of the outdoor temperature (TA) is calculated. The
daily temperature figure is calculated as follows:
Daily average of the outdoor temperature TA
DTf = (20° - TA) if TA < 15°
DTf = 0 if TA ≥ 15°
Monthly value: Total of daily values
Query period 1 month
Interval: 1 day

Query period 1 year

Interval: 1 month

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

282 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Degree days Degree days (ID: 2797)

Calculation of the heating degree days ( GTZ 15/15) (heating limit
15°C).
Inputs:
d_Data_point (outdoor temperature)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM (difference of the daily averages to 15 degrees)
If daily mean value > 15 degrees, then difference = 0.
The daily mean is calculated as standard arithmetic mean value.

Heating degree days AT Heating degree days AT (t9+t14+2x t21)/4 (ID: 2819)
(t9+t14+2x t21)/4 Calculation of degree days AT.
Inputs:
d_Data_point (temperature [°C])
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM(difference of daily averages to 15 degrees)
If daily mean value > 15 degrees, then difference = 0.
If daily average < 15 degrees, then:
RESULT[x] = (temperature(9:00) + temperature(14:00) + 2 x tem-
perature(21:00)) / 4

Configurable Meva Configurable Meva (ID: 2883)

Carries out a user-defined operation of the n
MEVA/datapoint/parameter inputs.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
m_MEVA_n

The following operators can be used: +, -. *, /, (, )

Placeholders for the n MEVA inputs based on their position are de-
fined as follows: 1, 2, n
Example: (:1 + :2 - :n) * :n / :1

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 283
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Load profile Load profile (ID: 2873)

Corrects a load profile using a correction value. A load profile is
recalculated based on a monthly correction value.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1 (load profile)
d_Data_point_2 (load profile correction)
The function returns:
The function first calculates the Real value of the sum (SumRealTo-
tal) as a function of the load profile (d_Data_point_1). It also calcu-
lates the last value for the entire analysis period and applies this as
correction value (LastCorrValue).
The following calculation is then performed for each interval:
Value = SUM REAL as a function of the current query period / Sum-
RealTotal * LastCorrValue

Last value Last value (ID: 2765)

Calculates the last measured value in the calculation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Last value in the calculation interval.

Gap check Gap check (ID: 2868)

Returns 1 if one of the connected data points contains gaps or val-
ues <= filter value; otherwise 0 is returned.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
d_Data_point_n
[t_Parameter (filter value)]
If t_Parameter is not used, then filter value = 0.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

284 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Max n Average Max n Average (ID: 2804)

Calculates the average of the n highest values since the beginning
of the year.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
t_Parameter
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Average of the n highest values since the beginning of
the year.
The replacement value configured in t_Parameter determines n.

Maximum Maximum (ID: 1720)

Calculates the largest value within the calculation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Largest value within the calculation interval.
Additional info:
If MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN in Energy Manager Options is set to 0, no
check for gaps in the time series (15 min) is performed. 1 means
that the check is performed. Only active if MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD
is disabled (= 0).
MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD can be used to set a percentage limit of
corrupted values as of which the corrupted result is also rejected. It
is also permitted to use decimal point values (e.g. 50.5); the func-
tion is disabled with "0". Only active if MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN is
disabled (= 0).

Maximum cumulated Maximum cumulated (ID: 2865)

Returns the cumulative maximum of all measured values within the
'From' time of the observation period until the 'T'o time of the calcu-
lation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Cumulative maximum of all measured values.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 285
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Maximum of n data points Maximum of n data points (ID: 2835)

Calculates the greatest measured value of n data points that lie
within the calculation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
d_Data_point_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Greatest measured value of n data points that lie within
the calculation interval.

Minimum Minimum (ID: 1718)

Calculates the smallest value within the calculation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Smallest value within the calculation interval.
Additional info:
If MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN in Energy Manager Options is set to 0, no
check for gaps in the time series (15 min) is performed. 1 means
that the check is performed. Only active if MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD
is disabled (= 0).
MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD can be used to set a percentage limit of
corrupted values as of which the corrupted result is also rejected. It
is also permitted to use decimal point values (e.g. 50.5); the func-
tion is disabled with "0" value. Only active if MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN
is disabled (= 0).

Minimum over actual year Minimum over actual year (ID: 2786)
Calculates the smallest value of all measured values within the fol-
lowing interval.
[Start of current year, To timestamp of the calculation interval]
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Smallest value of all measured values within the inter-
val above.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

286 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Minimum of n data points Minimum of n data points (ID: 2834)

Calculates the smallest measured value of n data points that lie
within the calculation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
d_Data_point_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Smallest measured value of n data points that lie within
the calculation interval.

Minus Minus (ID: 1735)

Calculates the difference of two MEVAs.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = m_MEVA_1 - m_MEVA_2

Average Average (ID: 1719)

Calculates the average of all measured values within the calculation
interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Average of all measured values within the calculation
interval.
Additional info:
If MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN in Energy Manager Options is set to 0, no
check for gaps in the time series (15 min) is performed. 1 means
that the check is performed. Only active if MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD
is disabled (= 0).
MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD can be used to set a percentage limit of
corrupted values as of which the corrupted result is also rejected. It
is also permitted to use decimal point values (e.g. 50.5); the func-
tion is disabled with "0". Only active if MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN is
disabled (= 0).

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 287
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Floating average x days for Floating average x days for Meva (ID: 2838)
Meva Calculation of the floating average of a MEVA.
Inputs:
m_MEVA
t_Parameter (number of days)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Average of the MEVA over the last n days.
The replacement value configured in t_Parameter determines the
number of days.

Average cumulated Average cumulated (ID: 2864)

Returns the cumulative average of all measured values within the
'From' time of the observation period until the 'To' time of the calcu-
lation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Cumulative average of all measured values.

Average with filter Average with filter (ID: 2861)

Returns the average of all measured values greater than the filter
value.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
[t_Parameter (filter value)]
If t_Parameter is not used, the filter value = 0.
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Average of all measured values greater than the filter
value.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

288 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Average of n data points Average of n data points (ID: 2836)

Calculates the average of n data points that lie within the calcula-
tion interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
d_Data_point_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Average of n data points that lie within the calculation
interval.

Average of n MEVAs Average of n MEVAs (ID: 2839)

Calculates the average of n MEVAs that lie within the calculation
interval.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
m_MEVA_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Average of n MEVAs that lie within the calculation
interval.

Average previous period Average previous period (ID: 2798)

Calculation of average of previous period.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = AVG(measured values), whereby the query period is set
back by one period (from/to).

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 289
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Multiplication Multiplication (ID: 2708)

Multiplies the results of the n MEVA/datapoint/parameter inputs.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
m_MEVA_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = m_MEVA_1 * m_MEVA_2 * … * m_MEVA_n)

Multiplication of 2 DPs with Multiplication of 2 DPs with cross sum (ID: 2690)
cross sum Forms the product of the data point values for each time stamp.
Returns the sum of the products contained therein for each calcula-
tion interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM (d_Data_point_1 * d_Data_point_2)
Additional info:
If MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN in Energy Manager Options is set to 0, no
check for gaps in the time series (15 min) is performed. 1 means
that the check is performed. Only active if MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD
is disabled (= 0).

Parameter Parameter (ID: 1728)

Calculates the valid parameter value since the start of the calcula-
tion interval.
Inputs:
t_Parameter
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = The valid parameter value since the start of the calcula-
tion interval.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

290 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Percentile cumulated Percentile cumulated (ID: 2867)

Returns the cumulative percentile of all measured values within the
'From' time of the observation period until the 'To' time of the calcu-
lation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
t_Parameter (percentile)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Cumulative percentile of all measured values.
The replacement value configured in t_Parameter determines the
percentile. The percentile must be in the range from 1 to 99.

Percent Percent (ID: 2732)

Calculates the quotient of two data points, multiplied by 100.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = (d_Data_point_1 / d_Data_point_2) * 100

Percentage Percentage (ID: 1739)

Calculates the quotient of two MEVAs, multiplied by 100.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = (m_MEVA_1 / m_MEVA_2) * 100

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 291
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Repair hours Repair hours (ID: 2770)

Calculates the total of all values in the validity period of the parame-
ter.
Inputs:
t_Parameter (repair hours)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Sum of all values in the validity period of the parame-
ter.

Rounding to n decimal places Rounding to n decimal places (ID: 2785)

Calculates rounded MEVA results
Inputs:
m_MEVA
t_Parameter
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = MEVA results rounded to the nth decimal place.
The replacement value configured in t_Parameter determines n.
n must be in the range from 0 ... 15.

Number of switching cycles Switching cycles (ID: 1730)

Used to calculate the number switching cycles in the
monitoring period
Inputs:
d_Data_point (with logical 0/1 signal).
The function returns:
VALUE[x] = Number of all real 0-1 or 1-0 transitions

Upper threshold element Upper threshold element (ID: 1769)

Calculates all MEVA values which are below the threshold. Other-
wise, the threshold is returned.
Inputs:
m_MEVA
t_Parameter (threshold)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = IF(m_MEVA < t_Parameter, m_MEVA, t_Parameter)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

292 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Lower threshold element Lower threshold element (ID: 2681)

Calculates all MEVA values which are above the threshold. Other-
wise, the threshold is returned.
Inputs:
m_MEVA
t_Parameter (threshold)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = IF(m_MEVA > t_Parameter, m_MEVA, t_Parameter)

Subtraction Subtraction (ID: 2772)

Subtracts the results of the n MEVA/datapoint/parameter inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2
m_MEVA_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = m_MEVA_1 - m_MEVA_2 - ... - m_MEVA_n

Subtraction with cross sum Subtraction with cross sum (ID: 2784)
Forms the difference of the n data point values for each time stamp.
Returns the sum of the differences contained therein for each calcu-
lation interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2
d_Data_point_n
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM (d_Data_point_1- d_Data_point_2 - … -
d_Data_point_n)
Additional info:
If MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN in Energy Manager Options is set to 0, no
check for gaps in the time series (15 min) is performed. 1 means
that the check is performed. Only active if MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD
is disabled (= 0).

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 293
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Sum Sum (ID: 1721)

Sum of all measured values scaled to the hour.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Sum (measured value * validity period) / 3600
Additional info:
MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD can be used to set a percentage limit of
corrupted values as of which the corrupted result is also rejected. It
is also permitted to use decimal point values (e.g. 50.5); the func-
tion is disabled with "0". Only active if MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN is
disabled (= 0).

Sum real Sum real (ID: 1779)

Calculates the sum of all measured values within the calculation
interval.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = Sum (measured value)
Additional info:
MEVA_STER_THRESHOLD can be used to set a percentage limit of
corrupted values as of which the corrupted result is also rejected. It
is also permitted to use decimal point values (e.g. 50.5); the func-
tion is disabled with "0". Only active if MEVA_CHECK_LUECKEN is
disabled (= 0).

Sum_HT Sum_HT (ID: 1763)

Sum of all measured values scaled to the hour as long as rate = 1.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2 (H/L rate, represented by 0 and 1)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM(measured value * validity period) / 3600 IF
d_Data_point_2 = 1

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

294 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Sum_HT_Real Sum_HT_Real (ID: 2733)

Sum of all measured values as long as rate = 1.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2 (H/L rate, represented by 0 and 1)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM(measured value) IF d_Data_point_2 = 1

Summe_NT Summe_NT (ID: 1764)

Sum of all measured values scaled to the hour as long as rate = 0
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2 (H/L rate, represented by 0 and 1)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM(measured value * validity period) / 3600 IF
d_Data_point_2 = 0

Sum_NT_Real Sum_NT_Real (ID: 2734)

Sum of all measured values as long as rate = 0.
Inputs:
d_Data_point_1
d_Data_point_2 (H/L rate, represented by 0 and 1)
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = SUM(measured value) IF d_Data_point_2 = 0

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 295
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Sum energy input Sum energy input (ID: 1772)

Calculates the sum of the energy input scaled to hour with inclusion
of parameter changes.
Inputs:
d_Data_point (flow in [m³/h], [Nm³/h])
t_Parameter (calorific value in [MWh/t] ,[MWh/Nm³])
The function returns:
RESULT[MWh] =Sum energy input[MWh] = SUM(d_Data_point *
validity period * t_Parameter)/ 3600

Sum energy input real Sum energy input real (ID: 1778)
Calculates the sum of the energy input with inclusion of parameter
changes.
Inputs:
d_Data_point (flow in [m³/h], [Nm³/h])
t_Parameter (calorific value in [MWh/t] ,[MWh/Nm³])
The function returns:
RESULT[MWh] =Sum energy input real [MWh] = SUM(d_Data_point
* t_Parameter)

Daily average AT(t9+t14+2x Daily average AT (t9+t14+2x t21)/4 (ID: 2820)

t21)/4 Calculates the daily average outdoor temperature.
Inputs:
d_Data_point
The function returns:
RESULT[x] = (temperature(09:00) + temperature(14:00) + 2 x tem-
perature(21:00)) / 4

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

296 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

If-Then If-Then ID: 2746

Calculates the MEVA result of the threshold depending on the logi-
cal expression.
Inputs:
m_MEVA_1
m_MEVA_2 OR t_Parameter
m_MEVA_3
m_MEVA_4
The function returns:
RESULT[x]=IF (m_MEVA_1 > m_MEVA_2; m_MEVA_1; 0)
RESULT[x]=IF (m_MEVA_1 > m_MEVA_2; m_MEVA_3; 0)
RESULT[x]=IF(m_MEVA_1 > m_MEVA_2; m_MEVA_3; m_MEVA_4)
Argument 2 may be a MEVA or parameter
Arguments 3 and 4 are optional.

Time window correction Time window correction (ID: 2902)

Moves the MEVA calculation results to the future or to the past.
Inputs:
m_MEVA
t_Parameter OR query type.
t_Parameter: with direction ("-": future; "+": past) and number of
periods, for example, "-1" to shift the data by one period into the
past.
Query type: Correction From-time on the basis of duration and off-
set of the query type, To-time remains unchanged.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 297
Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Input oil (incl. corr.) Input oil (incl. corr.) (ID: 1738)
Temperature compensated calculation of the oil supply.
Inputs:
t_Parameter_1 (reference density [t/m³])
t_Parameter_2 (reference temperature [°C])
t_Parameter_3 (correction factor [1/°C])
d_Data_point_1 (operating temperature [°C])
d_Data_point_2 (flow [m³/h])
The function returns:
RESULT[t] = oil supply[t] = SUM( d_Data_point_2 * validity period *(
t_Parameter_1 + (( t_Parameter_2 - d_Data_point_1 ) *
t_Parameter_3 ))) / 3600

Root (n-th of x) Root (n-th of x) (ID: 2930)

The MEVA needs two input objects: The first input "n" represents the
index of the formula and the second input "x" the radicand of the
formula.
Only (other) MEVAs, data points and parameter objects are permit-
ted as input object types.
If the transferred value is negative, the MEVA aborts with an error.

Power (n to the x-th) Power (n to the x-th) (ID: 2931)

The MEVA needs two input objects: The first input "x" represents the
base of the formula and the second input "n" the exponent of the
formula.
Only (other) MEVAs, data points and parameter objects are permit-
ted as input object types.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

298 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.6 Functions for measuring variables

Logarithm Logarithm (ID: 2932)

Calculates the natural logarithm of a number.
The MEVA requires one input object.
Only (other) MEVAs, data points and parameter objects are permit-
ted as input object types.
If the transferred value is 0 or negative, the MEVA aborts with an
error.

Power from energy Power from energy (ID: 2934)

Calculation of the electrical power for a specific measured value and
period.
The MEVA requires one input object.
Only data points are permitted as input object type.

Calculation formula:
Power value (kW) = Consumption value (kWh) / Entry inter-
val (in hours)
Maximum power Maximum power (ID: 2935)
Calculates the maximum electrical power for a specific period.
The MEVA requires one input object.
Only data points are permitted as input object type.

Calculation formula:
Max. power value (kW) = Max. consumption value (kWh) / Entry
interval (in hours)

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 299
Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.1 ASCII FTP import interface

Using the ASCII FTP import interface, you can import the content of ASCII files of diverse
formats to Energy Manager.
The specification for the supported formats is the same in all cases.
During the installation of Energy Manager, a sample file for each supported format in the
%Install-DIR%\EnMPRO\GUI\ftp directory is stored on the acquisition system.

File format Sample file

fp_Aprol ChronoLogDataExport_pfil_H_15_03_2010.txt
fp_bdata 20100627_000000_FribaDP01.txt
fp_xmlparser d_EL_E_7D_outside_temperature_20100101000000_20100102000000.xm
l
fp_dalog Dalog_File.txt
fp_excelcsv Excel_CSV.csv
fp_excelcsvNODST Excel_CSV_NODST.csv
fp_freja AVV_000112200_20100328000000_20100329000000.txt
TextValue TextValues.txt
fp_Zenon.dll zenOn.txt

The following chapters contain more information on the various parsers and supplied sample
files.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

300 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.2 APROL
APROL is a process control system. This system also exports the values as a "*.txt" file with a
specific HTML format. The structure will look as follows:
<record date=“YYYY-MM-DD“ time=“hh:mm:ss“ id=“Addressidentifier“>
<field name=“val“>Value</field>
<field name=“mode“>0</field>
</record>
To assign values to a data point, enter the address identifier of the values in the entry field
"Address" during configuration.

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 301
Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.3 BDATA
You can import "*.txt" files from B.Data with the format BDATA. Do not modify the files of
B.Data or else the import will no longer work. The separator is the semicolon sign. Each entry
also features quotation marks at the beginning and the end.
To assign values to a data point, enter the ID number of the values in the "Address" entry field
when configuring the data point. You can find the ID number under the entry "MESS_ID". The
ID number for the first entry in the example below is "00059".

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

Note
Where applicable, as in Germany, use a comma as the decimal separator for the operating
system.
Otherwise use a period as the decimal separator.
The figure above uses a period as the decimal separator. This file is therefore correct for non
German-speaking operating systems.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

302 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.4 BDATA_XML_Format
In Energy Manager you can export values in an "*.xml" file. You can import these values with
the BDATA_XML format. Do not modify the "*.xml" files of Energy Manager Pro or the import
will no longer work.
To assign values to a data point, enter the ID number of the values in the "Address" entry field
when configuring the data point. The ID number for the first entry in the example below is
"110357".

Note
Importing XML files with or without line breaks
If you wish to import an XML file with more than 65533 bytes, the XML file must be
formatted with line breaks.
If the XML file does not contain any line breaks, a maximum of 65533 bytes of data is
imported.

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 303
Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.5 DALOG
The DALOG system is a data storage system which imports values as a "*.txt" file. The
structure will look as follows:
The address identifiers of the individual data points are found in the first line:
Address label 1@ Address label 2@ Address label 3@ Address label 4
A "1" stands for each data point in the second line:
1@1@1@1
From the third line, the time stamps are listed with the respective values:
timestamp@Value1@Value2@Value3@Value4
To assign values to a data point, enter the address identifier of the values in the "Address"
entry field when configuring the data point.
The separator in this case is "@". The following structure is required for the time stamp:
YYYY.MM.DD hh:mm:ss

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

304 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.6 EXCELCSV
You can import CSV files from Excel with the EXCELCSV format.
In the EXCEL file, the time stamps of the values are listed in the first column (column A). The
format of the time stamp is the German time and date format: DD.MM.YYYY hh:mm
You can choose any header of the column with the time stamps.
From the second column, the values for a time stamp are entered. Every column represents a
data point. The address label for the values is the column header in the first line.
To assign values of a column to a data point, enter the address label of the values in the
"Address" entry field when configuring the data point.
The separator is the semicolon. However, the separator is only visible outside of Excel.

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 305
Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.7 EXCELCSVNODST
The difference between the formats EXELCSV and EXCELCSVNODST is the time basis. The
time stamps in this format are consistently requested in UTC+1 (standard time).
Energy Manager adds an hour with this format for representation in daylight saving time.
The structure of the file is identical to that of a file in the EXCELCSV format.

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

306 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.8 FREJA
The FREJA system is an energy accounting system. The system uses the data format "*.txt".
The required structure of the file is described in the following table:

Column Column header Contents Example

1 Year Year value of the timestamp 2018
2 Month Month value of the 03
timestamp
3 Day Daily value of the timestamp 28
4 Hour Hour value of the time stamp 09
5 Minute Minute value of the 45
timestamp
6 TAGname Address label HQK_FJV_ATOF_LEV_EGI_1M
7 Unit Unit of the value MWh
8 Value Value of the entry 200

Columns 9 and 10 with the column headers "Quality" and "Remark" are not used by Energy
Manager.
The separator field between the columns is a tabulator. Import is only possible with correct
column headers.
To assign values to a data point, enter the address label of the values in the "Address" entry
field when configuring the data point.

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 307
Reference
10.7 ASCII FTP formats

10.7.9 TextValue
You can import texts with this format.
The TextValue format has the following structure:
Time stamp;address label;text
The German time and date format is requested for the time stamp: DD.MM.YYYY hh:mm
The semicolon sign is the separator.

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

10.7.10 ZenOn
The ZenOn system is a system which saves values in a "*txt" file in CSV format. The required
structure of the "*.txt" file is described in the following table:

Column Contents Example

1 Address label H2_UYC01_CT001
2 Value of the entry 8.6
3 Standard or daylight saving time SPONT WINTER
4 Date of the timestamp 27 January 2018
5 Time of the timestamp 01:00:00

Example
The following figure shows a file with the required structure:

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

308 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

10.8 Log files

The log files for all components except the tasks are stored in the "Installation
directory\EnMPRO\GUI\mcl\trace".
The log files for the tasks are stored in the "Installation directory\EnMPRO\GUI\Logdateien".

10.8.1 Kernel

Structure of the messages

All messages in the kernel log file are structured as follows: Date|Time|Number: Alarm
The type of message is expressed by the number:

Number Message type

1000 Information
2000 Warning
3000 Error

Starting the kernel

When the kernel is started, the following informational message is written to the log file
when booting starts:
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: ----------------------------------------
-
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: Email Error Reporter started with user
defined warning level 'Severe'. Sending all messages >= 'Severe' to
operator.
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: MessageReporter Settings
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: MaxSize = 50000
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: Files = 1000
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: LastUsed = 85
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: BaseName =
C:\EnMPRO\GUI\mcl\trace\Kernel\tr
20190211|10:26:02:455|1000: ----------------------------------------
20190211|10:26:02:471|1000: B.Data Kernel v702.00.500.53, Feb 1 2019
(23:14:25)...
20190211|10:26:02:486|1000: © Siemens AG, 2016. All rights reserved.
20190211|10:26:02:486|1000: Start Update-Subscription Worker

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 309
Reference
10.8 Log files

20190211|10:26:02:486|1000: no external startup processes configured

20190211|10:26:02:486|1000: Update-Subscription: poll interval 10000
20190211|10:26:02:486|1000: Please note: Daylight saving is on.
We are in time zone "W. Europe Standard Time"/"W. Europe Daylight
Time", this means 3600 offset of GMT.
Please don't forget to get up on last Sun of Mar at 02:00:00 and
advance your clock 3600 secs.
Never mind, you can sleep longer on last Sun of Oct.
On that day at 03:00:00 time changes back.
The kernel is then configured. At each data point, the kernel checks whether "Log to DB" is
active.
The following message is written to the log file:
20190211|10:26:04:049|1000: create dblog d_PAC2200_E_Wh_T1_imp
"5151" mode 1
The meaning of the important sections of the message can be found in the following table:

Message section Meaning

create dblog Check where "Log to DB" is enabled
d_PAC2200_e_Wh_T1_imp Data point name
mode Test result:
• mode 0 = "Log to DB" not active
• mode 1 = "Log to DB" active

The acquired values are only forwarded to the Acquisition service when "Log to DB" is
enabled.
Once the kernel is ready to acquire values, the following message is written to the log file:
20181212|20:34:48:132|1000: sending all constants...

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

310 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

Kernel update event

When the configuration of a data point or interface changes, a kernel update event occurs.
The following events cause a kernel update event:
• Changing the cycle time of a data point or interface
• Changing the data point name
• Changing the data point address
When a kernel update event occurs, the following message is written to the log file:
20190205|10:34:38:755|1000: Kernel: Update Event received!
The kernel then checks at each data point, as described above, whether "Log to DB" is active.
After the check, the changed data point and the corresponding interface are re-configured.
The following message is written to the log file:
20190205|10:34:41:220|1000: Begin - Reconfiguration ----------------
----------------
20190205|10:34:41:226|1000: Update Tags in Buffer (11026)
20190205|10:34:41:232|1000: changes -> Update-Tag (11027)
20190205|10:34:41:243|1000: Linkin 11027->11027 : Parameter 0
already linked. Replacing it.
20190205|10:34:41:248|1000: Create Tag: Id= 11027 (BufferId= 11026)
20190205|10:34:41:254|1000: OPC-UA: Configured cycle time for Opc-Ua
buffer 'EnergySuite_IO' is 60 seconds
20190205|10:34:41:299|1000: Lastio of '11027' at 12.12.2018 20:29:00
20190205|10:34:41:344|1000: OPC-UA: Last IO for buffer was at
12.12.2018 20:29:00
20190205|10:34:41:391|1000: OPC-UA: WARNING: Creation of address
'ns=1;s=v|EnS_EnergyArchive\Ventilation_power' for 11027 was not
successful
20190205|10:34:41:437|1000: End - Reconfiguration-------------------
---------------

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 311
Reference
10.8 Log files

Information on acquisition components

If values are transferred from an acquisition component, the following message is written to
the log file:
20190206|10:04:25:170|1000: 2019-02-06 10:04:25 0-02:13:55 7296600
908.102/s (0s) 82
The meaning of the important sections of the message can be found in the following table:

Message section Meaning

2019-02-06 10:04:25 Time stamp of acquisition
0-02:13:55 Time since the acquisition runs in the following format:
Days-Hours:Minutes:Seconds
7296600 Number of measured values acquired since the acquisition
component has been running.
908.102/s Number of acquired values per second
(0s) Time elapsed since the last measured value acquisition.
82 Number of measured values in the cache

Number of inserted values

If values are forwarded to the acquisition service, the following message is written to the log
file:
20190205|13:34:41:437|1000: 500 numeric records inserted (32000
bytes)
In this example, "500" is the number of transmitted values and "32000 bytes" is the amount
of data.

Process ID
Each channel has a unique process ID. Each message about a channel starts with the process
ID of the channel in square brackets, as in the following example:
20190708|13:40:51:237|1000: [12508] ModBusDevice: OpenDevice: TCP/IP
connection error
In this example, 12508 is the process ID.
If you filter the log file by the process ID in square brackets, only the messages of the
corresponding channel are displayed.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

312 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

Shutting down the kernel

When the kernel is stopped or restarted, the following message is written to the log file:
20190211|10:21:04:189|1000: Sending answer 'OK|Shutdown in progress'
to client ''
20190211|10:21:04:194|1000: exit DELTAMANAGER
20190211|10:21:04:198|1000: Final Service Shutdown entered...
20190211|10:21:04:199|1000: Kernel: Update - Termination Event
receive!
20190211|10:21:04:199|1000: Kernel: Update Thread stopped!
20190211|10:21:04:199|1000: Stop Requester (4632) (bfs_modbus) ...
20190211|10:21:04:204|1000: Requester (4632) (bfs_modbus) -
stopped...
20190211|10:21:04:222|1000: Shut down database logger...
20190211|10:21:04:222|1000: Total Number of records stored: 82628
20190211|10:21:04:253|1000: Database Insertion thread stopped.
20190211|10:21:04:675|1000: shutdown ORA listener
20190211|10:21:04:768|1000: InsertionThread done.
20190211|10:21:04:768|1000: Wait for shutdown of database inserter
succeeded
20190211|10:21:04:768|1000: flush
C:\EnMPRO\GUI\mcl\sink\Kernel\sink00000n.bfs ...
20190211|10:21:04:768|1000: Wrote 128 records (8192 bytes) to file
C:\EnMPRO\GUI\mcl\sink\Kernel\sink00000n.bfs
20190211|10:21:04:768|1000: File Flush thread stopped.
20190211|10:21:05:284|1000: Wait for file flush thread succeeded
20190211|10:21:05:284|1000: Shut down command listener...
20190211|10:21:05:284|1000: SubscriptionWorkerThread stopped!

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 313
Reference
10.8 Log files

10.8.2 Acquisition service

The acquisition service is part of the acquisition component. There are several log files for the
acquisition service. The acquisition service consists of several components, for each of which
there is a log file.
The following table shows the various log files of the acquisition service and the tasks of the
corresponding components.

Log file Tasks

Compression Compression, plausibility, gap detection
Synchronization Synchronization of the local database of acquisition with the SQL
server on the application server.
Raw File Provider "Raw" files
Sink Data Importer Imported "SINK" files
Data Deletion Utilization of the local database, deletion of synchronized data
Acquisition Component Host Management of acquisition service components
SQL Provider Access to the local database of the acquisition

10.8.2.1 Compression
The "Compression" log file has a maximum size of 150 KB. The maximum number of log files
is 100.

Startup of the component

The compression component is initialized after the acquisition service is started. The number
of compression levels for each data point is logged as follows in the "Compression" log file:
2019-02-11 11:13:05,412 [ 5] [COP] - INFO - Initialize Compression
Component
2019-02-11 11:13:05,450 [ 5] [COP] - INFO - Load registry
settings...
2019-02-11 11:13:05,482 [ 5] [COP] - INFO - Load BData DB
settings...
2019-02-11 11:13:05,714 [21] [(null)] - INFO - LoginAccepted:
UserInfo= User ADMIN (505)
2019-02-11 11:13:06,969 [ 5] [COP] - INFO - Component Initialization
finished...
2019-02-11 11:13:06,971 [14] [COP] - INFO - Waiting until initial
configuration synchronisation is finished...
2019-02-11 11:13:11,973 [14] [COP] - INFO - Starting initialization
of compression configuration...
2019-02-11 11:13:12,173 [38] [(null)] - INFO - (PLSI) -
PlausibilityResult worker process started.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

314 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

2019-02-11 11:13:12,178 [14] [COP] - INFO - Build Measurement list

2019-02-11 11:13:13,333 [14] [COP] - INFO - (SINK) - Cycle for open
sink data recalculation : 30000 [msec]
2019-02-11 11:13:13,480 [14] [COP] - INFO - [5621] - Compression
configuration ended. Measurement contains 3 compression levels to
calculate.
2019-02-11 11:13:13,491 [14] [COP] - INFO - [5623] - Compression
configuration ended. Measurement contains 3 compression levels to
calculate.
2019-02-11 11:13:13,507 [14] [COP] - INFO - [5624] - Compression
configuration ended. Measurement contains 3 compression levels to
calculate.

Reception of the acquired measured values

When measured values are acquired, the reception of the values from the kernel is confirmed
with the following entry in the "Compression" log file:
2019-02-06 11:21:58,231 [13] [(null)] - INFO - Handle MemoryStream
time : 06.02.2019 10:21:58 length : 32000 starting

Calculation of the compression (RCAL)

If a compressed interval is calculated, the interval and the number of compressed values are
specified:
2019-02-14 10:30:14,031 [34] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [13230]* -
tCLevel:2105 ENDTIME:14.02.2019 09:30:00 in recalculation...
2019-02-14 10:30:14,048 [34] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [13230] 1
recalculation orders found
2019-02-14 10:30:14,059 [34] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [13230]
fCLevel:2100 tCLevel:2105 fDT:14.02.2019 09:15:00 tDT:14.02.2019
09:30:00 in recalculation...
2019-02-14 10:30:14,138 [34] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [13230] -
467 msjoValues for fCLevel:2100 and range: fDT:14.02.2019 09:15:00
tDT:14.02.2019 09:30:00 found
2019-02-14 10:30:14,183 [34] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [13230]** -
tCLevel:2105 ENDTIME:14.02.2019 09:30:00 (fDT:14.02.2019 09:15:00)
recalculation finished...

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 315
Reference
10.8 Log files

Calculation for the defined compression levels (CMPR)

If compressions calculated by the acquisition service were written to the local database, the
write operation is logged in the log file as follows with the following message:
2019-02-14 10:30:06,210 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CMPR) - 1 open items
to handle
2019-02-14 10:30:06,267 [35] [(null)] - INFO - 1 measurement numeric
values inserted successfully
The acquisition service calculates all compressions up to the "Daily values" compression level.

Checking the plausibility limits (PLSI)

If limits of a data point are active, the acquired measured values are checked. If a limit is
violated, an alarm is generated. In this case, the following message is written to the log file:
2019-02-14 10:36:42,157 [37] [(null)] - INFO - (PLSI) [13230] -
Alarm Upper Limit violation: PlausiResult: ID:13230 DT:1550136970
DV:0,866025403852806 ST:1 ME:17 CL:2

Gap detection (PLSI)

If a gap occurs and an alarm is generated, this generation is logged in the log file as follows:
2019-02-14 12:17:00,196 [32] [(null)] - INFO - (PLSI) GAP violation:
PlausiResult: ID:13230 DT:1550142952 DV:0 ST:1 ME:12 CL:2

Changes in the tables of the local database (SYNC)

If one of the tables in the local database is changed, the following entry is written to the log
file:
2019-02-14 10:12:05,175 [ 6] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) - TB_MESSUNG
changed: 1 items to Insert
2019-02-14 10:12:05,240 [ 6] [(null)] - INFO - [13230] - Compression
configuration ended. Measurement contains 3 compression levels to
calculate.
2019-02-14 10:12:05,255 [ 6] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) - [13230]
measurement Insert
2019-02-14 10:12:05,265 [ 6] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) -
TB_COMPRESSION changed: 2 items to Insert2019-02-14 10:22:08,387
[31] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) - TB_MESSUNG changed: 1 items to
Update2019-02-14 10:22:08,398 [31] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) -
[13230] measurement Update
2019-02-14 10:36:12,795 [17] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) - TB_MESSUNG
changed: 1 items to Update
2019-02-14 10:36:12,802 [17] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) - [13230]
measurement Update
2019-02-14 10:36:12,809 [17] [(null)] - INFO - (SYNC) -
TB_MESS_PLAUSI_LIMIT changed: 1 items to Insert

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

316 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

Shutting down the component

When the component is stopped, the following message is written to the log file:
2019-02-11 11:12:28,397 [12] [(null)] - INFO - Shutdown compression
component.
2019-02-11 11:12:28,398 [12] [(null)] - INFO - Stop initialization
process
2019-02-11 11:12:28,574 [48] [(null)] - INFO - (MSTR) - Exit
MeasurementStringData worker process.
2019-02-11 11:12:28,576 [47] [(null)] - INFO - (CMPR) - Exit
CompressionResult worker process.
2019-02-11 11:12:28,604 [41] [(null)] - INFO - (PLSI) - Exit
PlausibilityResult worker process.
2019-02-11 11:12:28,604 [46] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - Exit
Recalculation worker process.

10.8.2.2 Raw file provider

This log file is usually empty.
A "Raw" file with the acquired measured values is created for each day and each data point.
If an error occurs while creating or writing the values, this is logged in this log file.

10.8.2.3 SinkDataImporter
If the kernel cannot forward the acquired values to the Acquisition service, the values are
written to "SINK" files. SinkDataImporter checks if new "SINK" files are available once every
minute.
If there are no new "SINK" files, the following message is written to the log file:
2019-02-06 11:11:17,507 [28] [(null)] - INFO - (DATASINNK) -
Datasink Importer SearchFolders -> C:\EnMPRO\mcl\sink\Kernel |
C:\EnMPRO\mcl\sink\FTP
2019-02-06 11:11:17,508 [28] [(null)] - INFO - (DATASINNK) - Watch
for new sink files -> C:\EnMPRO\mcl\sink\Kernel
2019-02-06 11:11:17,509 [28] [(null)] - INFO - (DATASINNK) - Watch
for new sink files -> C:\EnMPRO\mcl\sink\FTP
When there are new "SINK" files, the SinkDataImporter tries to import the new files.
In this case, the following message is written to the log file:
2019-02-06 11:12:17,972 [28] [(null)] - INFO - (DATASINNK) - Import
-> sink00024n.bfs succeeded
2019-02-06 11:12:17,974 [28] [(null)] - INFO - (DATASINNK) - Move
File from C:\EnMPRO\mcl\sink\Kernel\sink00024n.bfs to
C:\EnMPRO\mcl\sink\Kernel\Imported\20190206_111217973_sink00024n.bfs
The imported values are written to the "Raw" files.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 317
Reference
10.8 Log files

10.8.2.4 Data deletion

An overview is written to the "Data deletion" log file once every minute. The overview shows
the size of the local database and information about the deleted values of the local database.
The following figure shows the overview:

10.8.2.5 Acquisition component Host

This log file is empty by default.
If an error occurs when initializing components of the acquisition service, this error is logged
in the log file.

10.8.2.6 SQL provider

This log file is empty by default.
If it is not possible to access to the local database, a corresponding error message is written to
the log file.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

318 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

10.8.3 Calculation service

10.8.3.1 Calculation service

The calculation service is part of the application server. There are several log files for the
calculation service. The calculation service consists of several components, for each of which
there is a log file.
The following table shows the various log files of the acquisition service and the tasks of the
corresponding components.

Log file Tasks

Recalculation Calculation and recalculation of compressions and data points
MEVA calculation Calculation of MEVAs/KPIs
Counter calculation Calculation of counter differences of acquired values
Machine calculation Calculation of the consumers
Calculation component host Management of calculation service components

10.8.3.2 Recalculation
The "Recalculation" log file is for messages related to the compression of the acquired
measured values. The log file has a maximum size of 151 KB. The maximum number of log
files is 100.

Calculation of compressions (RCAL)

If a compressed interval is calculated by the Acquisition service, the interval and the number
of compressed values are specified:
2019-02-14 12:31:34,348 [31] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [9887] 1
recalculation orders found
2019-02-14 12:31:34,352 [31] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [9887]
fCLevel:2105 tCLevel:2110 fDT:23.11.2019 02:00:00 tDT:23.11.2019
03:00:00 in recalculation...
2019-02-14 12:31:34,367 [31] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [9887] - 4
msjoValues for fCLevel:2105 and range: fDT:23.11.2019 02:00:00
tDT:23.11.2019 03:00:00 found
2019-02-14 12:31:34,378 [31] [(null)] - INFO - (RCAL) - [9887]** -
tCLevel:2110 ENDTIME:23.11.2019 03:00:00 (fDT:23.11.2019 02:00:00)
recalculation finished...

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 319
Reference
10.8 Log files

Retroactive billing of derived data points (DCAL)

When a derived data point is re-calculated, the interval and the number of compressed values
is specified:
2019-03-12 12:17:00,582 [39] [(null)] - INFO - (DCAL) - ## Begin
automatic recalculation of derived recalculation entrys...
2019-03-12 12:17:00,587 [39] [(null)] - INFO - (DCAL) - Search for
open derived datapoints to (re)calculate
2019-03-12 12:17:00,623 [39] [(null)] - INFO - (DCAL) - 140 open
derived datapoints to (re)calculate
2019-03-12 12:17:00,629 [39] [(null)] - INFO - (DCAL) - [13732] -
Autom. Calculate f:12/31/2018 11:00:00 PM t:3/11/2019 11:00:00 PM
2019-03-12 12:17:01,016 [39] [(null)] - INFO - (DCAL) - [13733] -
Autom. Calculate f:12/31/2018 11:00:00 PM t:3/11/2019 11:00:00 PM
2019-03-12 12:17:01,549 [39] [(null)] - INFO - (DCAL) - 140 open
derived measurement orders recalculated
2019-03-12 12:17:01,554 [39] [(null)] - INFO - (DCAL) - ## End
automatic recalculation of derived recalculation entrys...

Substitute values (REPV)

The Calculation service cyclically checks whether new gaps must be filled and fills these gaps
if necessary. For each cyclic check for missing replacement values, an entry is written to the
log file:
2019-02-14 13:52:31,762 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (REPV) - Missing Gaps
filled for 13235; set last corr timestamp to 14.02.2019 12:51:00

Extrapolation and interpolation (EXPA)

The Calculation service cyclically checks whether new interpolations or extrapolations must
be calculated and calculates these interpolations and extrapolations. For each cyclic check for
missing interpolations and extrapolations, an entry is written to the log file:
2019-02-14 14:03:23,110 [37] [(null)] - INFO - (EXPA) - ** Begin
search of complevel configuration for expansion...
2019-02-14 14:03:23,129 [37] [(null)] - INFO - (EXPA) - Found 0 rows
to check for expansion
2019-02-14 14:03:23,135 [37] [(null)] - INFO - (EXPA) - ** End
search for expansion values...
2019-02-14 14:03:23,140 [37] [(null)] - INFO - (EXPA) - ** Begin
search of complevel configuration for interpolation...
2019-02-14 14:03:23,158 [37] [(null)] - INFO - (EXPA) - Found 0 rows
to check for interpolation
2019-02-14 14:03:23,164 [37] [(null)] - INFO - (EXPA) - ** End
search for interpolation values

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

320 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

Calculation of compressions on the application server (NLCO)

With the following exceptions, the Acquisition service calculates all compressions up to daily
values. If values are entered in a matrix or values are transferred directly to the SQL server
(compression of acquisition values to acquisition values), the Calculation service calculates
the corresponding compressions. The Calculation service cyclically checks whether a
calculation of such compressions is available:
2019-02-14 13:52:39,485 [36] [(null)] - INFO - (NLCO) - Check
compression level: 2120
2019-02-14 13:52:39,505 [36] [(null)] - INFO - (NLCO) - Check
compression level: 2105
2019-02-14 13:52:39,538 [36] [(null)] - INFO - (NLCO) - Check
compression level: 2110
2019-02-14 13:52:39,561 [36] [(null)] - INFO - (NLCO) - Check
compression level: 2101
In the same interval, the Calculation service checks the counter value filter:
2019-02-14 13:47:52,365 [36] [(null)] - INFO - (NLCO) - Start
Counter filter check...
2019-02-14 13:47:52,624 [36] [(null)] - INFO - (NLCO) - Update 14
compression until dates
2019-02-14 13:47:52,691 [36] [(null)] - INFO - (NLCO) - End of
Counter filter check...

Automatic compression
ACOP messages indicate the number of compression intervals for which a recalculation is
due. When the recalculation of a compression interval is pending, a RCAL message is written
to the log file.
2019-02-14 14:03:32,912 [32] [(null)] - INFO - (ACOP) - Search for
pending compression calculation...
2019-02-14 14:03:32,949 [32] [(null)] - INFO - (ACOP) - No pending
automatic compressions found
2019-02-14 14:03:32,956 [32] [(null)] - INFO - (ACOP) - Search for
past changes to recalculate compression calculation...
2019-02-14 14:03:33,901 [32] [(null)] - INFO - (ACOP) - No pending
past changes recalculations found

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 321
Reference
10.8 Log files

10.8.3.3 MEVA calculation

If the calculation of a MEVA/KPI is triggered, a message is written to this log file.
The following objects can trigger the calculation of a MEVA/KPI :
• Report
• Chart
• Dashboard
• Derived data point

10.8.3.4 Counter calculation

If values of a counter are entered directly via the matrix, the Calculation service calculates the
counter differences. The Calculation service cyclically checks whether calculation counter
differences are available. The number of counter differences the Calculation service
calculates is written to this log file:
2019-02-11 11:43:36,458 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) - ** Begin
search for open counter recalculation...
2019-02-11 11:43:36,473 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) - Cleanup of
closed counter recalculation items performed successfully
2019-02-11 11:43:36,475 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) - Read counter
recalculation rows to handle
2019-02-11 11:43:36,506 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) - Calcuation
ended; no values for DB saving calculated
2019-02-11 11:43:36,516 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) - Counter
recalc ended; Update 0 recalc items in DB
2019-02-11 11:43:36,517 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) -
intMainObjektReaderCnt: 0
2019-02-11 11:43:36,518 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) - 0 open
counter recalculation items merged
2019-02-11 11:43:36,519 [35] [(null)] - INFO - (CRCL) - ** End
search for open counter recalculation...

10.8.3.5 Machine calculation

The calculation of consumers is recorded in the "Machine calculation" log file.

10.8.3.6 Calculation component host

The Calculation component host component manages the components of the Report service.
If an error occurs when initializing components of the Acquisition service, this error is
recorded in the log file.
Otherwise this log file is empty.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

322 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.8 Log files

10.8.4 Report Server

The server of the Report service is on the same system as the SQL server.
The reporting service performs the following tasks:
• Report generation
• Conversion of EXEL files into PDF files
• Sending reports
• Saving reports
• Printing reports
The "Report Server" log file has a maximum size of 200 KB. The maximum number of log files
is 1000.

Starting a report
When a report is started manually or automatically, the actions are logged during report
generation.
The main actions are as follows:
• Loading the template
• Filling the template
• Executing macros

Report automation
The following automated actions are logged:
• Sending the report
• Saving the report
• Print the report

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 323
Reference
10.8 Log files

10.8.5 MindUpload
The "MindUpload" log file has a maximum size of 121 KB.
A new log file is created for each day.
The following events are logged in this log file:
• Onboarding
The onboarding of the Energy Manager in the MindSphere is recorded in this log file.
If onboarding does not work, an error message is written to the log file.
• Data transfer
The number of uploaded values is written to the log file for each data transfer cycle to
MindSphere.

10.8.6 Tasks
When a task is executed, a "Tasks" log file is created. The log file consists of the following
three entries:
2019-01-16 10:19:04,892 - INFO - Start Task "Export measurement
values" for Node "Export values as xml_h_Local_PC" (NodeID: 4737).
This entry enables you to find which task is executed.
2019-01-16 10:19:05,683 - INFO - Export file
"Export_000004737_20190114000000_20190116000000.xml" written.
This entry contains the name of the file with the exported values.
2019-01-16 10:19:05,740 - INFO - End Task after runtime of
00:00:02.100: 3 entries have been exported.
This entry enables you to find the time in which the task was executed and the number of
exported values.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

324 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.9 Cipher Suites

10.9 Cipher Suites

If you are hosting the web server yourself, do not configure insecure connections.
Configure the connection with a Cipher Suite from the following list. Prioritize a Cipher Suite
with a security rating of 5 over a Cipher Suite with a security rating of 4.

List of recommended Cipher Suites

Cipher Suites are registered in TLS up to version 1.2 for the Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA). The following table is based on the Cipher Suites registered with IANA and
has been extended with a Siemens security rating. The following table lists only Cipher Suites
that have a security rating of at least 4.

Cipher Suite Value for IANA Siemens security

assessment
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x3C 4
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x3D 4
TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x3E 4
TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x3F 4
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x40 5
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x67 5
TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x68 4
TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x69 4
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x6A 5
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x6B 5
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0x00, 0x9C 4
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0x00, 0x9D 4
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0x00, 0x9E 5
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0x00, 0x9F 5
TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0x00, 0xA0 4
TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0x00, 0xA1 4
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0x00, 0xA2 5
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0x00, 0xA3 5
TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0x00, 0xA4 4
TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0x00, 0xA5 4
TLS_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xBA 4
TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xBB 4
TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xBC 4
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xBD 4
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xBE 4
TLS_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xC0 4
TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xC1 4
TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xC2 4
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xC3 5
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0xC4 5
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x23 5
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x24 5

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 325
Reference
10.9 Cipher Suites

TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x25 4

TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x26 4
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x27 5
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x28 5
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x29 4
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x2A 4
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0xC0, 0x2B 5
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0xC0, 0x2C 5
TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0xC0, 0x2D 4
TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0xC0, 0x2E 4
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0xC0, 0x2F 5
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0xC0, 0x30 5
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 0xC0, 0x31 4
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0xC0, 0x32 4
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x72 5
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x73 5
TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x74 4
TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x75 4
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x76 5
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x77 5
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_128_CBC_SHA256 0xC0, 0x78 4
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_CAMELLIA_256_CBC_SHA384 0xC0, 0x79 4
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM 0xC0, 0x9C 4
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM 0xC0, 0x9D 4
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM 0xC0, 0x9E 5
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM 0xC0, 0x9F 5
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CCM 0xC0, 0xAC 5
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CCM 0xC0, 0xAD 5
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_CHACHA20_POLY1305_ 0xCC, 0xA8 5
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_CHACHA20_POLY1305_ 0xCC, 0xA9 5
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 0xCC, 0xAA 5

Key length
Use a recommended Cipher Suite with a recommended key length for the encryption
algorithm.
The following table lists the recommended key lengths:

Algorithm Minimum key length

Key length for signature key for certificates and key agreement
ECDSA 250 bit
DSS 2000 - 3000 bit*
RSA 2000 - 3000 bit*
Key length for Diffe-Hellmann
ECDH/ECDHE 250 bit
DHE 2000 - 3000 bit*

*Starting in 2023, use a key length of at least 3000 bits.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

326 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.10 Counter value filtering

10.10 Counter value filtering

Energy Manager filters values of data points for which a counter is configured differently to
values of other data points. You configure this filter at the configuration of the counter.
The following representation shows the possible error cases that are detected by the counter
value filter and how they are corrected. A constant consumption of 10 kWh is used in this
example.

① One to three negative deviations

② One to three positive deviations
③ Offset downwards with subsequent constant values
④ Gaps
⑤ Offset downwards

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 327
Reference
10.10 Counter value filtering

⑥ Offset upwards
⑦ Blue line: Counter values before counter value correction
⑧ Green, dashed line: Counter values after counter value correction
⑨ Black, dashed line: Upper and lower limit of the counter value that results from the consumption limits
Figure 10-1 Diagram of counter value filtering

Filtering options
• Counter value filtering
Invalid counter values are deleted.
• Counter value difference filtering
Consumption values that are outside of the valid range are corrected.
• Gap recognition
Missing counter values filled in automatically and subsequent calculation of consumption.
The following table specifies through which criteria the different error cases are detected and
how the error cases are corrected:

Error case Detection of the error case Correction of the error case
One to three negative deviations Through counter value filtering or With invalid counter values, the counter
through the low limit of counter value value is deleted and the resulting gap is
difference filtering filled in through linear interpolation.
With invalid consumption values, the
consumption value is deleted and the
resulting gap is filled in through linear
interpolation.
One to three positive deviations Through the high limit of the counter With invalid counter values, the counter
value difference filtering value is deleted and the resulting gap is
filled in through linear interpolation.
With invalid consumption values, the
consumption value is deleted and the
resulting gap is filled in through linear
interpolation.
Offset downwards with subsequent Counter value difference - lower limit Correction of the constant values
constant values and constant values through linear interpolation. The num-
ber of constant values after the offset is
not limited.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

328 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.10 Counter value filtering

Error case Detection of the error case Correction of the error case
Gaps in the counter values Gap recognition If the counter value after the gap ≥ the
counter value before the gap, the gap is
filled in through linear interpolation.
If the counter value after the gap < the
counter value before the gap, a counter
overflow is assumed. There are the two
following overflow options:
• With a cyclic (triggered) reset, inter-
polation takes place between the
start value of the counter and the
counter value after the gap.
• With a normal overflow, interpola-
tion takes place between the last
value before the gap and the first
value after the gap.
Offset of the counter values down- Counter value difference - lower limit Correction of negative consumption to
wards and as a result increasing values zero.
Offset of the counter values upwards Counter value difference - upper limit Correction of excessive consumption to
and as a result increasing values zero.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 329
Reference
10.10 Counter value filtering

Linear interpolation
Linear interpolation is used to fill in gaps. The duration of the gap is not limited.
With linear interpolation, the counter value difference between the last valid counter value
and the current counter value is calculated. This counter value difference is then divided by
the number of intervals between the two values.
In the Energy Manager, a distinction is made between the following cases:
• Current counter value ≥ last valid counter value
No overflow of the counter is assumed.
• Current counter value < last valid counter value
An overflow of the counter is assumed. There are the two following overflow options:
– Cyclic reset activated

– Normal overflow

Note
Entry of counter values via the matrix
If you enter an invalid counter value in the matrix and the filters are activated, the entered
value is removed and is not visible. Linear interpolation is applied with the input of the next
value.

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

330 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Reference
10.11 Provision of Energy Manager data

10.11 Provision of Energy Manager data

10.11.1 Energy Manager Data Service

10.11.1.1 Basics on the Energy Manager Data Service

The Data Service REST API interface is made available by an Energy Manager system at an
application server to query the following data:
• Times series of measurements
• Batch data
The Data Service REST API interface is accessible on the application server at:
http(s)://<ApplicationServerName>/EnMPRODataService

10.11.1.2 Interface description of the Energy Manager Data Service

You can find the document describing the provided interface functions in the documentation
directory of an Energy Manager installation.

GERMAN:
..\EnMPRO\Documentation\DE\simatic_energy_manager_data_service_v1_0_en-DE.pdf

ENGLISH:
..\EnMPRO\Documentation\en\simatic_energy_manager_data_service_v1_0_en-EN.pdf

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 331
Index

A I
ASCII - FTP interface Import
Functions, 300 Data import from ASCII files, 300
Interface management, 10

C
L
Change
Password, 17 Login
Cost center management, 10 Energy Manager PRO Web, 15

E M
Energy management Measuring variable
Arguments in favor of energy management, 9 Database functions, 276
Basics, 9
Energy Manager PRO Web
Basics, 12 N
Creating Quicklinks, 26
Navigation
Editing Quicklinks, 28
Quicklinks, 21
Folder, 31
Login, 15
Navigation, 20
P
Working with reports, 41
Energy Manager Web Password
Logoff, 19 change, 17, 17
Product Information, 19 forgotten, 17, 17
Switching the view, 19 Purpose of this documentation, 11

F Q
forgotten Quicklink
Password, 17 Customize background, 30
Customize icon, 30
Delete, 30
G Rename, 30
Specifying the homepage, 30
Groups, functional
Overview, 268
Guides, 11
R
Required basic knowledge, 11

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

332 Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ
 Index

S
Scope of validity, 11

T
Time unit abbreviations, 267

V
Value
Correction status, 265

SIMATIC Energy Manager Basic V7.4 – Operation

Operating Manual, 04/2023, A5E45273397-AJ 333